Downloaded from www.Manualslib.

com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299

10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1
INTRODUCTION
• INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
• ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
• IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
• HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
• WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
• VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
• VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INTRODUCTION As with other vehicles of this type, failure to has the qualified personnel, special tools and
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss equipment to perform all service.
Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it repre- of control or a collision. Be sure to read the
The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally
sents precision workmanship, distinctive styl- “On-Road/ Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
interested in your complete satisfaction with
ing, and high quality - all essentials that are And Operating” for further information.
this vehicle. If you encounter a service or
traditional to our vehicles. NOTE: warranty problem which is not resolved to your
This is a specialized utility vehicle, it can go After you read the manual, it should be satisfaction, discuss the matter with your autho-
places and perform tasks for which conven- stored in the vehicle for convenient refer- rized dealer or distributor’s management.
tional two–wheel drive vehicles were not in- encing and remain with the vehicle when Your authorized dealer or distributor will be
tended. It handles and maneuvers differently sold so that the new owner will be aware of happy to assist you with any questions about
from many passenger cars both on-road and all safety warnings. your vehicle.
off-road, so take time to become familiar with
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
your vehicle. ROLLOVER WARNING
result in loss of control or a collision.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-
Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or over rate than other types of vehicles. This
Owner’s Manual and all the Supplements. Be
while intoxicated may result in loss of control, vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
collision with other vehicles or objects, going higher center of gravity than many passenger
particularly those used for braking, steering,
off the road, or overturning; any of which may cars. It is capable of performing better in a
and transmission and transfer case shifting.
lead to serious injury or death. Also, failure to wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in
Learn how your vehicle handles on different
road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve use seat belts subjects the driver and passen- an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of
gers to a greater risk of injury or death. control. Because of the higher center of gravity
with experience, but as in driving any vehicle,
take it easy as you begin. When driving off-road To keep your vehicle running at its best, have and the narrower track, if this vehicle is out of
or working the vehicle, don’t overload it or your vehicle serviced at recommended inter- control it may roll over when some other ve-
expect it to overcome the forces of nature. vals by an authorized dealer or distributor who hicles may not.
Always observe local laws wherever you drive.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, IMPORTANT NOTICE The manufacturer reserves the right to make
or other unsafe driving actions that can cause ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLI- changes in design and specifications, and/or
loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this CATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFORMA- to make additions to or improvements in its
vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover TION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICATION products without imposing any obligations
of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive APPROVAL. THE RIGHT IS RESERVED TO upon itself to install them on products previ-
carefully. PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME. ously manufactured.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with The Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes
the assistance of service and engineering spe- the features that are standard or available as
cialists to acquaint you with the operation and extra cost options. Therefore, some of the
maintenance of your new vehicle. It is supple- equipment and accessories in this publication
mented by a Warranty Information Booklet and may not appear on your vehicle.
various customer-oriented documents. You are NOTE:
urged to read these publications carefully. Fol-
lowing the instructions and recommendations Be sure to read the Owner’s Manual first
before driving your vehicle and before at-
in this Owner’s Manual will help assure safe
taching or installing parts/accessories or
and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
making other modifications to the vehicle.
Rollover Warning Label After you have read the Owner’s Manual, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat reference and remain with the vehicle when
belts provided is a major cause of severe or sold.
fatal injury. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 In view of the many replacement parts and Your warranties do not cover any part that the HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
accessories from various manufacturers avail- manufacturer did not supply. Nor do they cover Consult the Table of Contents to determine
able on the market, the manufacturer cannot be the cost of any repairs or adjustments that which section contains the information you de-
certain that the driving safety of your vehicle might be caused or needed because of the sire.
will not be impaired by the attachment or instal- installation or use of non-manufacturer parts,
Since the specification of your vehicle depends
lation of such parts. Even if such parts are components, equipment, materials, or addi-
officially-approved (for example, by a general tives. Nor do your warranties cover the costs of on the items of equipment ordered, certain
operating permit for the part or by constructing repairing damage or conditions caused by any descriptions and illustrations may differ from
the part in an officially approved design), or if changes to your vehicle that do not comply with your vehicle’s equipment
an individual operating permit was issued for the manufacturers specifications. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s
the vehicle after the attachment or installation Original Mopar姞 parts and accessories and Manual contains a complete listing of all sub-
of such parts, it cannot be implicitly assumed jects.
other products approved by the manufacturer,
that the driving safety of your vehicle is unim- including qualified advice, are available at your Consult the following table for a description of
paired. Therefore, neither experts nor official authorized dealer. the symbols that may be used on your vehicle
agencies are liable. Therefore the manufacturer
When it comes to service, remember that your or throughout this Owner’s Manual:
only assumes responsibility when parts, which
are expressly authorized or recommended by authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has
the manufacturer, are attached or installed at the factory-trained technicians and genuine
an authorized dealer. The same applies when Mopar姞 parts, and is interested in your satis-
modifications to the original condition are sub- faction.
sequently made on the manufacturer’s ve- Copyright © 2010 Chrysler International.
hicles.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is ALTERATIONS
against operating procedures that could result found on the left front corner of the instrument
in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle WARNING!
CAUTIONS against procedures that could re- through the windshield. This number also ap- Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
sult in damage to your vehicle. If you do not pears on the right side frame rail and the
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and
read this entire manual, you may miss impor- Automobile Information Disclosure Label af-
tant information. Observe all Warnings and fixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
Cautions. label for a convenient record of your vehicle serious injury or death.
identification number and optional equipment.

NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
YOUR VEHICLE
• A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• To Release the Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System . . . . . 14
• SENTRY KEY姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
• Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
• Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . 15
• Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
• REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . 16
• To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
• To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
• To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
• Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
• Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
• DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
• Upper Half Door Window Removal — If Equipped . . . . . . 18
• Upper Half Door Window Installation — If Equipped . . . . 19
• Front Door Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
• Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) . . . . . . . . . . . 19
• DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
• Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
• Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
• Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
• Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
• Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . . . . . 22
• WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
• Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • REAR SWING GATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
• OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
• Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
• Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout
(Four-Door Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
• Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 28
• Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . 28
• Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . 29
• Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
• Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
• Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert姞) . . 30
• Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbags . . . . . . 31
• Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . . . . . . . . 34
• Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
• Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
• ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
• Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
• Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
• Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
• Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . 49
• Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make OutsideThe
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 3. Push the ignition key inward. NOTE:
The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
plastic bag with the key code number on it. If and remove the key. when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK
you received your keys without the bag, ask or ACC position.
your authorized dealer to give you the number.
The key code can also be obtained by your WARNING! STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF
authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is EQUIPPED
Ignition Key Removal dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive
others could be injured. Children should be steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering
1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped
with an automatic transmission). warned not to touch the parking brake, brake the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steer-
pedal, or the shift lever. Do not leave the key ing wheel is moved approximately a half turn in
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (ACCES-
in the ignition. A child could operate power either direction, and the key is not in the igni-
SORY) position.
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. tion, the steering wheel will lock.
To Manually Lock the Steering
CAUTION! Wheel
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. With the engine running, rotate the steering
Always remove the key from the ignition, and wheel one–half revolution from the straight
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat- ahead position, turn off the engine, and remove
the key. Rotate the steering wheel slightly in
tended.
both directions until the lock engages.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder To Release the Steering Wheel Lock
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the Insert the key in the ignition, and turn the wheel
Ignition Switch Positions ignition, sounds a signal to remind you to slightly to the left or right, to disengage the lock.
1 — LOCK 3 — ON/RUN remove the key.
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 4 — START

13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in CAUTION!
If you turned the wheel to the right to engage The Sentry Key姞 Immobilizer system is not
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to
start the engine. compatible with some after-market remote
the right to disengage it. If you turned the
wheel to the left to engage the lock, turn the starting systems. Use of these systems may
NOTE:
wheel slightly to the left to disengage it. result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
A key, which has not been programmed, is security protection.
Automatic Transmission Ignition also considered an invalid key even if it is
Interlock System cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for All of the keys provided with your new vehicle
This system prevents the key from being re- that vehicle. have been programmed to the vehicle electron-
moved unless the shift lever is in PARK. It also During normal operation, after turning on the ics.
prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is ignition switch, the Vehicle Security Light will
in the ON/RUN position, and the brake pedal is turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If
Replacement Keys
depressed. the light remains on after the bulb check, it NOTE:
indicates that there is a problem with the elec- Only keys that have been programmed to
SENTRY KEY姞 tronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash
The Sentry Key姞 Immobilizer system prevents the vehicle electronics can be used to start
after the bulb check, it indicates that someone the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key姞 has been
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro-
the engine. The system does not need to be these conditions will result in the engine being grammed to any other vehicle.
armed or activated. Operation is automatic, shut off after two seconds.
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during CAUTION!
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle
The system uses ignition keys, which have an
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
embedded electronic chip (transponder), to is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, unattended.
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. There- have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
fore, only keys that are programmed to the
by an authorized dealer.

14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 At the time of purchase, the original owner is lands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, five second delay for another 30 seconds. If the
provided with a four-digit Personal Identifica- Russian Federation, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, trigger remains present this cycle will repeat for
tion Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure Switzerland, Yugoslavia, and United Kingdom. up to five minutes.
location. This number is required for authorized Operation is subject to the following conditions:
dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys
To Arm The System
consists of programming a blank key to the • This device may not cause harmful interfer- 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and
vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which ence. exit the vehicle.
has never been programmed. See your autho- • This device must accept any interference 2. Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the
rized dealer if you require replacement or ad- that may be received, including interference power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button
ditional keys for your vehicle. that may cause undesired operation. on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
NOTE: NOTE:
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
When having the Sentry Key姞 Immobilizer The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if
system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle you lock the doors with the manual door
you to the authorized dealer. lock plungers or the driver’s door lock cyl-
doors, hood, swing gate, and ignition for unau-
Customer Key Programming thorized operation. inder.
See your authorized dealer if you require re- 3. Close all the doors.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
placement or additional keys for your vehicle.
Security Alarm will sound the horn intermit- The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
General Information tently, flash the headlights and taillights, and cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to
The Sentry Key姞 operates on a carrier fre- flash the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster. signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming.
quency of 433.92 MHz. The Sentry Key姞 Immo- Rearming Of The System During this period, opening any door or the
bilizer system will be used in the following If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle swing gate will cancel the arming process. If
European countries, which apply Directive Security Alarm will signal with the siren for the Vehicle Security Alarm arms successfully,
1999/5/EC: Austria, Belgium, Czech Republic, 30 seconds. If the triggering device is not the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower
Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, deactivated the siren will sound again after a rate to indicate the alarm is set.
Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Nether-
15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To Disarm The System ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE The interior lights will come on when you open
transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key姞 into the any door.
ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the The lights will remain on after all of the doors
ON/RUN position. are closed, and then fade to off or they will
NOTE: immediately fade to off once the ignition switch
• Unlocking the doors with the manual door is turned on.
lock plungers or the driver’s door lock
cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Secu-
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
rity Alarm. IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is doors and swing gate from distances approxi-
armed, the interior power door lock mately 35 ft (11 m) using a hand-held Remote NOTE:
switches will not unlock the doors. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE trans- The line of transmission must not be
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to pro- mitter does not need to be pointed at the blocked with metal objects.
tect your vehicle; however, you can create vehicle to activate the system.
conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will To Unlock The Doors And Swing
give you a false alarm. If the previously de- Gate
scribed arming sequence has occurred, the Press and release the UNLOCK button on the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of RKE transmitter once to unlock only the driver’s
whether you are inside or outside the vehicle. If door or twice to unlock all the doors and swing
you remain inside the vehicle and open a door, gate. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the illuminated entry will turn on, and the parking
Vehicle Security Alarm. lights will flash on twice.

16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The system can be programmed to unlock all To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will
the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE cause the alarm to sound. Press the RKE
by using the following procedure: transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signals transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate
will flash and the horn will chirp once to ac- the Vehicle Security Alarm.
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a pro-
grammed RKE transmitter. knowledge the lock signal. The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can be
To Turn Off “Flash Lights With reactivated by repeating this procedure.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least
4 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, Lock” Programming Additional
then press and hold the UNLOCK button on the NOTE: Transmitters
RKE transmitter. Refer to Sentry Key姞 “Customer Key Program-
The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can be
3. Release both buttons at the same time. turned on or off using the following steps: ming.”
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, 1. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button If you do not have a programmed RKE trans-
by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the for 4 to 10 seconds. mitter, contact your authorized dealer for de-
RKE transmitter. tails.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after
NOTE: four seconds) press the RKE transmitter LOCK General Information
Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE trans- button. Release both buttons. Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier
mitter while you are inside the vehicle will frequency of 433.92 MHz as required by EEC
3. Test the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature regulations. These devices must be certified to
activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening outside of the vehicle, by pressing the RKE
a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm acti- conform to specific regulations in each indi-
transmitter LOCK button with the ignition in the vidual country. Two sets of regulations are
vated will cause the alarm to sound. Press LOCK position, and the key removed.
the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Ve- involved: ETS (European Telecommunication
hicle Security Alarm. NOTE: Standard) 300–220, which most countries use,
Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button and German BZT federal regulation 225Z125,
5. If the desired programming was not which is based on ETC 300–220 but has addi-
while you are in the vehicle will activate the
achieved or to reactivate this feature, repeat tional unique requirements. Other defined re-
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with
the above steps.
17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMIS- two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Use DOORS
SION DIRECTIVE 95/56/EC. Operation is extreme care not to damage the seal or inter-
subject to the following two conditions: nal components. CAUTION!
• This device may not cause harmful interfer- Careless handling and storage of the remov-
ence. able door panels may damage the seals,
• This device must accept any interference causing water to leak into the vehicle’s inte-
received, including interference that may rior.
cause undesired operation.
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate
Upper Half Door Window Removal
from a normal distance, check for these two — If Equipped
conditions. 1. Grasp the half door window and pull up-
1. Weak battery in transmitter. The expected ward.
life of the battery is a minimum of three years. Separating RKE Key Fob Halves
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid
radio station tower, airport transmitter, and
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
some mobile or CB radios.
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you
Transmitter Battery Replacement touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
The recommended replacement battery is 3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap
CR2032. the two halves together.
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing
down, use a flat blade screw driver to pry the
Upper Half Door Window

18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Upper Half Door Window Installation 2. Unplug the wiring harness connector under 3. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.
— If Equipped the instrument panel by pressing the tab at the Be careful not to allow the door to swing fully
side of the connector and pulling to discon- open as the mirror may damage paint.
1. Grasp the half door window and line up pins nect.
into pockets in lower door. 4. With the door open, lift the door to clear
NOTE: hinge pins from their hinges, and remove door.
2. Push down to ensure the half door window is
If the red latch on the connector is locked, To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
fully seated.
push the red latch to the right until you can steps in the opposite order.
Front Door Removal only see the latch on one end (right) of the
connector. This will unlock the connector Rear Door Removal (Four-Door
1. Remove the hinge pin screws from the up- Models)
tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down and
per and lower outside hinges (using a #T50
enabling the harness to be disconnected. 1. Remove the hinge pin screws from the up-
Torx姞 head driver).
per and lower outside hinges (using a #T50
Torx姞 head driver).

Hinge Pin Screw 1 — Harness Connector

2 — Body Hook
3 — Door/Harness Strap Hinge Pin Screw

19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Slide front seat(s) fully forward. NOTE:
3. Remove the trim access door from the bot- The ignition key that is used to start the
tom of B-pillar. vehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors,
swing gate, and console storage.

Red Connector Latch

5. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.

6. With the door open, lift the door to clear
Trim Access Door hinge pins from their hinges, and remove door.
Manual Door Lock
4. Unplug the wiring harness connector. To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
NOTE: steps in the opposite order. WARNING!
If the red latch on the connector is locked, • For personal security reasons and safety in
DOOR LOCKS
push the red latch to the right until you can an accident, lock the vehicle doors when
only see the latch on one end (right) of the Manual Door Locks you drive, as well as when you park and
connector. This will unlock the connector The front (two-door models) and rear doors leave the vehicle.
tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down and (four-door models) are equipped with a rocker-
enabling the harness to be disconnected. type interior door lock. To lock the door when (Continued)
leaving your vehicle, press the LOCK position
and close the door.
20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. • For personal security reasons and safety in 6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is an accident, lock the vehicle doors when Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child you drive, as well as when you park and Programming
or others could be seriously or fatally in- leave the vehicle. The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature
jured. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. can be enabled or disabled as follows:
child could operate power windows, other Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is 1. Close all doors and place the key in the
controls, or move the vehicle. dangerous for a number of reasons. A child ignition.
or others could be seriously or fatally in-
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK
Power Door Locks — If Equipped jured. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four
The door lock switch is located on each front child could operate power windows, other times ending up in the LOCK position.
door panel. Press the switch forward to lock the controls, or move the vehicle.
doors, and rearward to unlock the doors. 3. Press the power door unlock switch to un-
lock the doors.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles 4. A single chime will indicate the completion
with power door locks if: of the programming.
1. The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” fea- 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this
ture is enabled. feature to its previous setting.
2. The transmission was in gear and the ve- NOTE:
hicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h). Use the “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit”
3. The transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL feature in accordance with local laws.
or PARK.
Power Door Lock Switch 4. The driver door is opened.

21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Door Locks 3. Press the power door LOCK switch to lock
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles the doors.
with power door locks if all of the following 4. A single chime will indicate the completion
conditions are met: of the programming.
1. The “Automatic Door Locks” feature is en- 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this
abled. feature to its previous setting.
2. The transmission is in gear. NOTE:
3. All doors are closed. Use the “Automatic Door Locks” feature in
4. The throttle is pressed. accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph Child-Protection Door Lock System
(24 km/h). — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small chil- WARNING!
6. The doors were not previously locked using dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a colli-
the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock sys- sion. Remember that the rear doors can only
Entry (RKE) transmitter. tem. be opened from the outside when the Child-
Automatic Door Locks Programming To engage or disengage the Child- Protection locks are engaged.
The “Automatic Door Locks” feature can be Protection Door Lock system
enabled or disabled as follows: NOTE:
1. Open the rear door.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the For emergency exit with the system en-
ignition. 2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock gaged, move the rocker lever rearward (un-
and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position. locked position), roll down the window and
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear open the door with the outside door handle.
and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four
times ending up in the LOCK position. door.

22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WINDOWS NOTE: Window Lockout Switch — Four-Door
The switches will continue to function for up Models
Power Windows — If Equipped The window lockout switch (located between
to two minutes after the ignition key has
The power window switches are located on the the front window switches) allows you to dis-
been removed, or until a front door is
instrument panel below the radio. Press the able the rear window switches that are located
switch downward to open the window and opened.
on the back of the center floor console. To
upward to close the window. Four-Door Models disable the window controls, press the window
The lower left switch controls the left rear pas- lockout button downward. To enable the win-
senger window, and the lower right switch dow controls, press the window lockout button
controls the right rear passenger window. upward.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window
switches have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press
the window switch past the first detent, release,
and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the
switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
Power Window Switches
To stop the window from going all the way down
The top left switch controls the left front window during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
and the top right switch controls the right front switch briefly.
window. Window Lockout Switch
To partially open the window, press halfway to
the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.

23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Power Windows — Four-Door Models REAR SWING GATE
The rear passenger window switches are lo- CAUTION!
The swing gate can be unlocked by using the
cated on the back of the center floor console. Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing
key, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or
Press the switch downward to open the window by activating the power door lock switches the rear flip-up window, as damage to the
and upward to close the window. located on the front doors. blade will result.
To open the swing gate, press the button on the
gate handle. WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the flip-up window closed
when you are operating the vehicle.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in
Rear Power Window Switches (Four-Door your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Models)
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the
Wind Buffeting Gate Handle driver and all passengers
Wind buffeting can be described as the per- NOTE: • Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front
ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter- Close the rear flip-up window before at- passenger
type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit
wind buffeting with the windows down in cer-
tempting to close the swing gate (hard top • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags
models only). (SAB) — if equipped
tain open or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized by • An energy-absorbing steering column and
adjusting window opening. steering wheel
24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occu- Please pay close attention to the information in inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor
pants this section. It tells you how to use your restraint vehicle should be belted at all times.
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to system properly, to keep you and your passen-
gers as safe as possible.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
enhance occupant protection by managing All seating positions in your vehicle are
occupant energy during an impact event equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The belt
WARNING! webbing retractor is designed to lock during
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) In an accident, you and your passengers can
include Automatic Locking Retractors very sudden stops or accidents. This feature
suffer much greater injuries if you are not allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
(ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into
position by extending the belt all the way out properly buckled up. You can strike the interior freely with you under normal conditions. How-
and then adjusting the belt to the desired of your vehicle or other passengers, or you ever, in an accident the belt will lock and
length to restrain a child seat or secure a can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
large item in a seat — if equipped sure you and others in your vehicle are buck- vehicle or being thrown out.

If you will be carrying children too small for led up properly.

WARNING!
adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the
Buckle up even though you are an excellent • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
ISOFIX feature also can be used to hold infant
and child restraint systems. For more informa- driver, even on short trips. Someone on the inside or outside of a vehicle. In an acci-
tion, refer to ISOFIX — Child Seat Anchorage road may be a poor driver and cause an dent, people riding in these areas are more
System. accident that includes you. This can happen far likely to be seriously injured or killed.
away from home or on your own street. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of
NOTE:
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multi- and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries and seat belts.
stage inflator design. This allows the airbag in an accident. Some of the worst injuries • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
to have different rates of inflation based on happen when people are thrown from the ve- seat and using a seat belt properly.
the severity and type of collision. hicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejec-
tion and the risk of injury caused by striking the (Continued)

25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is danger- 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
ous. Seat belts are designed to go around back and adjust the seat.
the large bones of your body. These are the 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
strongest parts of your body and can take the front seat, next to your arm in the rear seat.
the forces of an accident the best. Wearing Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide
your belt in the wrong place could make the latch plate up the webbing as far as nec-
your injuries in an accident much worse. essary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you
could even slide out of part of the belt. Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers WARNING!
safe, too. • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
• Two people should never be belted into a will not protect you properly. The lap portion
single seat belt. People belted together can could ride too high on your body, possibly
crash into one another in an accident, causing internal injuries. Always buckle
hurting one another badly. Never use a your belt into the buckle nearest you.
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than • A belt that is loose will not protect you
Pulling Out the Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
one person, no matter what their size. properly. In a sudden stop you could move
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the too far forward, increasing the possibility of
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a injury. Wear your seat belt snug.
“click.”
(Continued)

26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE:
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on • A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a
until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
dangerous. Your body could strike the in- collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure
side surfaces of the vehicle in an accident, the belt is straight. If you cannot straighten
increasing head and neck injury. A belt a belt in your vehicle, take it to your autho-
worn under the arm can cause internal rized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
that the strongest bones will take the force neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in
in a collision. the belt.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during an accident. 6. To release the belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to
You are more likely to hit your head in a
Removing Slack from Belt its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
collision if you do not wear your shoulder plate down the webbing to allow the belt to
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to retract fully.
WARNING!
be used together.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, risk of internal injury in an accident. The
below your abdomen. To remove slack in the belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To pelvic bones, but across your abdomen.
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt and keep it snug.
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
accident. (Continued)

27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If the rear seatback is properly latched Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting
WARNING! and the rear center lap/shoulder belt still
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an Procedure
cannot be pulled out, the Automatic- Use the following procedure to untwist a
accident and leave you with no protection. Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be twisted lap/shoulder belt.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking activated. To reset this feature you must
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts let all of the belt webbing return into the 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible
must be replaced immediately. Do not disas- retractor. You will not be able to pull out to the anchor point.
semble or modify the system. Seat belt as- more webbing until all of the webbing has 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the
semblies must be replaced after an accident if been returned back into the retractor. latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing
they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, 180 degrees to create a fold that begins imme-
torn webbing, etc.). WARNING! diately above the latch plate.
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt with a lock-out feature to ensure that the rear webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
Retractor Lockout (Four-Door seatback is in the fully upright and locked slot at the top of the latch plate.
Models Only) position when occupied. If the rear seatback is 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
This feature is designed to lock the retractor not fully upright and locked and the rear clears the folded webbing.
whenever the 60% rear seatback is not fully center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled out of
latched. This prevents someone from wearing the retractor, the vehicle should immediately Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
the rear center lap/shoulder belt when the rear be taken to your authorized dealer for service. Anchorage
seatback is not fully latched. In the front seat positions, the shoulder belt
Failure to follow this warning could result in
anchorage can be adjusted upward or down-
NOTE: serious or fatal injury. ward to position the belt away from your neck.
• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot Push in on the anchorage near your outside
be pulled out, check that the rear seat- shoulder and slide it up or down to reach the
back is fully latched. position that serves you best.

28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When you release the anchorage, try to move it Driver Center Passen-
up or down to make sure that it is locked in ger
position. First Row N/A N/A ALR
NOTE: Second ALR ALR ALR
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor- Row
age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. Third Row N/A N/A N/A
This feature allows the shoulder belt an- • N/A — Not Applicable
chorage to be adjusted in the upward posi-
tion without pressing the release button. To • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is If the passenger seating position is equipped
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt with an ALR and is being used for normal
anchorage until it is locked into position usage:
WARNING! Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to
Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so Positions comfortably wrap around the occupants mid-
that the belt rests across the middle of your The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt tions are equipped with Automatic Locking is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as
properly could reduce the effectiveness of the Retractors which are used to secure a child the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
seat belt and increase the risk of injury in an restraint system. For additional information re- completely in this case and then carefully pull
accident. fer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The out only the amount of webbing necessary to
Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraint” comfortably wrap around the occupants mid-
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you section. The chart below defines the type of section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller feature for each seating position. until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
than average, you will prefer a higher position.

29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) How To Disengage The Automatic Locking pant early in an accident. Pretensioners work
Mode — If Equipped Mode for all size occupants, including those in child
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt restraints.
pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove and allow it to retract completely to disengage NOTE:
any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. These devices are not a substitute for
Locking Mode is available on all passenger- proper seat belt placement by the occupant.
seating positions with a combination lap/ The seat belt still must be worn snugly and
shoulder belt. WARNING! positioned properly.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode • The belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the seat belt assembly Auto- The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air-
child safety seat is installed in a seating posi- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or
bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A
tion that has a belt with this feature. Children any other seat belt function is not working
deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag
12 years old and under should always be properly when checked according to the must be replaced immediately.
properly restrained in the rear seat. procedures in the Service Manual.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking • Failure to replace the belt and retractor Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
Mode assembly could increase the risk of injury in System (BeltAlert姞)
collisions. BeltAlert姞 is a feature intended to remind the
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder driver to fasten their seatbelt. This feature is
belt. active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver is
Seat Belt Pretensioners
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down- The seat belts for both front seating positions unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
ward until the entire belt is extracted. are equipped with pretensioning devices that on and remain on until the driver seatbelt is
are designed to remove slack from the seat belt fastened. BeltAlert姞 triggers within 60 seconds
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, of vehicle speed over 5 mph (8 km/h). The
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates in the event of an accident. These devices
improve the performance of the seat belt by reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking the driver seatbelt is fastened. After the se-
Mode. assuring that the belt is tight about the occu-
quence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Light remains illuminated until the driver seat- Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
belt is fastened. The driver should instruct all We recommend that pregnant women use seat
other occupants to fasten their seatbelts. If the belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the
driver seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at mother safe is the best way to keep the baby
speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert姞 safe.
will chime as a single notification and illuminate
the Seat Belt Reminder Light, then will proceed Pregnant women should wear the lap part of
to the 96 second reminder sequence. the belt across the thighs and as snug across
the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that
NOTE: it does not come across the abdomen. That
• BeltAlert姞 can be enabled or disabled by way the strong bones of the hips will take the
your authorized dealer. force if there is an accident. Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster
• Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend Locations
Supplemental Restraint System
deactivating BeltAlert姞. (SRS) — Airbags 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air-
bags
If BeltAlert姞 is deactivated, the Seat Belt This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for 2 — Knee Bolster
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate both the driver and right front passenger as a
while the driver’s seat belt remains unfas- supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. NOTE:
tened. The driver’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted
in the steering wheel. The passenger Ad- These airbags are certified to new regula-
vanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instru- tions for Advanced Airbags.
ment panel, above the glove compartment. The The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
letters SRS are embossed on the airbag cov- inflator design. This allows the airbag to have
ers. different rates of inflation that are based on the
severity and type of collision.

31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 This vehicle may be equipped with a driver • Steering Wheel and Column
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch WARNING!
• Instrument Panel • No objects should be placed over or near
that detects whether the driver or front passen-
ger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle • Knee Impact Bolster the airbag on the instrument panel, be-
switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad- cause any such objects could cause harm if
• Driver Advanced Front Airbag
vanced Front Airbags. the vehicle is in a collision severe enough
• Passenger Advanced Front Airbag to cause the airbag to inflate.
This vehicle may be equipped with Supple-
mental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB) to • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags • Do not put anything on or around the airbag
provide enhanced protection for an occupant (SAB) covers or attempt to open them manually.
during a side impact. The Supplemental Seat- • Front and Side Impact Sensors You may damage the airbags and you
Mounted Side Airbags are located in the out- could be injured because the airbags may
board side of the front seats. • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners and Seat Belt no longer be functional. The protective cov-
Buckle Switch
NOTE: ers for the airbag cushions are designed to
Advanced Front Airbag Features open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim; but they will open during
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multi- • If your vehicle is equipped with Supplemen-
stage driver and front passenger airbags. This tal Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB), do
airbag deployment. system provides output appropriate to the se-
• After any accident, the vehicle should be not use accessory seat covers or place
verity and type of collision as determined by
taken to an authorized dealer immedi- objects between you and the SAB; the
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
ately. may receive information from the front impact performance could be adversely affected
sensors. and/or objects could be pushed into you,
Airbag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the follow- causing serious injury.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
ing airbag system components: during an impact that requires airbag deploy- (Continued)
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) ment. This low output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for
• Airbag Warning Light more severe collisions.
32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING! (Continued) The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
• If your vehicle is equipped with SAB, do not knees of the driver and the front passenger,
attach cupholders or any other objects on and position front occupants for the best inter-
or around the door. The inflating SAB could action with the Advanced Front Airbags.
drive the objects into occupants, causing
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Ad-
serious injury. vanced Front Airbags work with the knee bol-
• Do not cover or place items on the airbag sters to provide improved protection for the
covers. These items may cause serious driver and front passenger. Side airbags also
injury during inflation. work with seat belts to improve occupant pro-
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag tection.
bolster in any way. Location Here are some simple steps you can take to
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee
When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam minimize the risk of harm from a deploying
bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citi- airbag:
zen band radios, etc. between the front and side of the seat’s trim
cover. Each airbag deploys independently, that 1. Children 12 years and under should always
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags is a left side impact deploys the left airbag only ride buckled up in a rear seat.
(SAB) — If Equipped and a right-side impact deploys only the right
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags pro- airbag. WARNING!
vide enhanced protection to help protect an Infants in rear facing child restraints should
occupant during a side impact. The Supple- WARNING! never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a
mental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag is marked Being too close to the Supplemental Seat- passenger airbag. An airbag deployment
with an airbag label sewn into the outboard Mounted Side Airbag during deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants
side of the front seats. could cause you to be severely injured or in that position.
killed.

33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Children that are not big enough to properly son, contact the Customer Center. Phone num- NOTE:
wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in bers are provided under “If You Need Assis- After any accident, the vehicle should be
the rear seat, in a child restraint or belt- tance”. taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
positioning booster seat. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning Airbag Deployment Sensors And
WARNING!
booster seats should ride properly buckled up • Relying on the airbags alone could lead to Controls
in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide more severe injuries in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
the shoulder belt behind them or under their The ORC is part of a regulated safety system
airbags work with your seat belt to restrain
arm. required for this vehicle.
you properly. In some collisions, the air-
You should read the instructions provided with bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your The ORC determines if deployment of the front
your child restraint to make sure that you are seat belts even though you have airbags. and/or side airbags is required in a frontal or
using it properly. • Being too close to the steering wheel or side collision. Based on the impact sensors
2. All occupants should always use their lap instrument panel during airbag deployment signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the
and shoulder belts properly. could cause serious injury, including death. Advanced Front Airbags, Supplemental Seat-
Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, Mounted Side Airbags (SAB) — if equipped,
3. The driver and front passenger seats should and front seat belt pretensioners, as required,
be moved back as far as practical to allow the comfortably extending your arms to reach
depending on each type of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate. the steering wheel or instrument panel.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If • If the vehicle has Supplemental Seat- Advanced Front Airbags are designed to pro-
Mounted Side Airbags (SAB), they also vide additional protection by supplementing
your vehicle has side airbags, and deployment the seat belts in certain frontal collisions de-
occurs, the side airbags will inflate forcefully need room to inflate. Do not lean against
pending on the severity and type of collision.
into the space between you and the door. the door or window. Sit upright in the center
Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to of the seat. reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
be modified to accommodate a disabled per- collisions.

34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
all frontal collisions, including some that may airbag system is not on and the airbags will not WARNING!
produce substantial vehicle damage — for inflate. Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your
example, some pole collisions, truck under- instrument panel could mean you won’t have
The ORC contains a backup power supply the airbags to protect you in a collision. If the
rides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
system that may deploy the airbags even if the
hand, depending on the type and location of light does not come on as a bulb check when
battery loses power or it becomes discon-
impact, Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in the ignition is first turned on, stays on after
nected prior to deployment.
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
that produce a severe initial deceleration. Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag drive, have an authorized dealer service the
Warning Light for four to eight sec-
The side airbags will not deploy in all side airbag system immediately.
onds for a self-check when the
collisions. Side airbag deployment will depend ignition is first turned on. After the
on the severity and type of collision. self-check, the Airbag Warning
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front
Airbag Inflator Units
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle de- Light will turn off. If the ORC de-
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front
celeration over time, vehicle speed and dam- tects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of
age by themselves are not good indicators of turns on the Airbag Warning Light either mo-
the steering wheel and the right side of the
whether or not an airbag should have de- mentarily or continuously. A single chime will
instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
ployed. sound if the light comes on again after initial
collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags,
startup.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
all crashes, and also are needed to help keep It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Ad-
you in position, away from an inflating airbag. the instrument cluster Airbag Warning Light if a vanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation
malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag rates are possible, based on the collision type
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the airbag system whenever system. The diagnostics also record the nature and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover
of the malfunction. and the upper right side of the instrument panel
the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
positions. If the key is in the LOCK position, in separate and fold out of the way as the airbags
inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate

35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half are not seated properly, or if items are posi- • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The tioned in the area where the side airbag in- long as the battery has power or until the
airbags then quickly deflate while helping to flates. This especially applies to children. ignition key is removed.
restrain the driver and front passenger. Knee Impact Bolsters • Unlock the doors automatically.
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the If A Deployment Occurs
through the vent holes in the sides of the knees of the driver and the front passenger, The front airbags are designed to deflate im-
airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere and position front occupants for the best inter-
mediately after deployment.
with your control of the vehicle. action with the Advanced Front Airbag.
NOTE:
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags Front And Side Impact Sensors
(SAB) Inflator Units — If Equipped In front and side impacts, front and side impact Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags sensors can aid the ORC in determining the all collisions. This does not mean some-
Inflator Units (if equipped) are designed to appropriate response to certain impact events. thing is wrong with the airbag system.
activate only in certain side collisions. Enhanced Accident Response System If you do have a collision which deploys the
The ORC determines if a side collision requires In the event of an impact causing airbag de- airbags, any or all of the following may occur:
the side airbags to inflate based on the severity ployment, if the communication network re- • The nylon airbag material may sometimes
and type of collision. mains intact, and the power remains intact, cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to
depending on the nature of the event the ORC the driver and front passenger as the air-
Based on the severity and type of collision, the
will determine whether to have the Enhanced bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are
side airbag inflator on the crash side of the
vehicle is triggered, releasing a quantity of Accident Response System perform the follow- similar to friction rope burns or those you
ing functions: might get sliding along a carpet or gymna-
non-toxic gas. The inflating side airbag exits
through the seat seam into the space between • Cut off fuel to the engine. sium floor. They are not caused by contact
the occupant and the door. The side airbags with chemicals. They are not permanent and
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery normally heal quickly. However, if you
fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side has power or until the ignition key is turned
airbag moves at a very high speed and with off.
such a high force, that it could injure you if you
36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 haven’t healed significantly within a few Maintaining Your Airbag System
days, or if you have any blistering, see your WARNING!
doctor immediately. • Deployed airbags and seat belt pretension-
WARNING!
ers cannot protect you in another collision.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some • Modifications to any part of the airbag
Have the airbags, seat belt pretensioner,
smoke-like particles. The particles are a nor- system could cause it to fail when you need
and seat belt retractor assembly replaced
mal by-product of the process that gener- it. You could be injured if the airbag system
ates the non-toxic gas used for airbag infla- by an authorized dealer as soon as imme-
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
the components or wiring, including adding
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
any kind of badges or stickers to the steer-
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your
ing wheel hub trim cover or the upper right
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. airbag system. The airbag may inflate ac-
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
cidentally or may not function properly if
these particles settle on your clothing, follow the front bumper or vehicle body structure,
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for or add aftermarket side steps or running
to an authorized dealer for any airbag sys-
cleaning. boards.
tem service. If your seat, including your trim
• You need proper knee impact protection in
• Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in
have deployed. If you are involved in another a collision. Do not mount or locate any
any way (including removal or loosening/
collision, the airbags will not be in place to aftermarket equipment on or behind the
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take
protect you. knee bolsters.
the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
manufacturer approved seat accessories the airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the anyone who works on your vehicle that it
airbag system for persons with disabilities, has an airbag system.
contact your authorized dealer.

37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Airbag Warning Light hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- data with the type of personally identifying
You will want to have the airbags
formed. The EDR is designed to record data data routinely acquired during a crash in-
ready to inflate for your protection
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems vestigation.
in a collision. The Airbag Warning
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
Light monitors the internal circuits To read data recorded by an EDR, special
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
and interconnecting wiring associ- equipment is required, and access to the ve-
record such data as:
ated with airbag system electrical hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
components. While the airbag system is de- • How various systems in your vehicle were vehicle manufacturer, other parties such as law
signed to be maintenance free, if any of the operating; enforcement, that have the special equipment,
following occurs, have an authorized dealer • Whether or not the driver and passenger can read the information if they have access to
service the airbag system immediately. safety belts were buckled/fastened;
the vehicle or the EDR.
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing Child Restraints
during the four to eight seconds when the the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled
ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN up at all times, including babies and children.
position. • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Children 12 years and under should ride prop-
• The Airbag Warning Light remains on after These data can help provide a better under- erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
the four to eight-second interval. standing of the circumstances in which crashes According to crash statistics, children are safer
and injuries occur. when properly restrained in the rear seats,
• The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving. NOTE: rather than in the front.

Event Data Recorder (EDR) EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only There are different sizes and types of restraints
This vehicle is equipped with an event data if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no for children from newborn size to the child
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
data are recorded by the EDR under normal almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like driving conditions and no personal data Always check the child seat owner’s manual to
situations, such as an air bag deployment or (e.g. name, gender, age, and crash location) ensure you have the correct seat for your child.
are recorded. However, other parties, such Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 rearward-facing by children who weigh more
WARNING! than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year WARNING! (Continued)
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a old. Both types of child restraints are held in • A rearward-facing infant restraint should
tiny baby, can become a projectile inside the the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the only be used in a rear seat. A rearward-
vehicle. The force required to hold even an ISOFIX child restraint anchorage system facing infant restraint in the front seat may
infant on your lap could become so great that (Refer to ISOFIX — Child Seat Anchorage be struck by a deploying passenger airbag
you could not hold the child, no matter how System.) which may cause severe or fatal injury to
strong you are. The child and others could be the infant.
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle WARNING!
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s • Rearward-facing child seats must never be Here are some tips for getting the most out of
size. used in the front seat of a vehicle with the your child restraint:
front passenger airbag unless the airbag is • Before buying any restraint system, make
Infants And Child Restraints turned off. An airbag deployment could sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
• Safety experts recommend that children ride cause severe injury or death to infants in all applicable Safety Standards. The manu-
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are this position. facturer also recommends that you try a
at least one year old and weigh at least • Improper installation can lead to failure of child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child restraints an infant or child restraint. It could come will use it before you buy it.
can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers loose in a collision. The child could be • The restraint must be appropriate for your
and “convertible” child seats. badly injured or killed. Follow the manufac- child’s weight and height. Check the label on
• The infant carrier is only used rearward- turer’s directions exactly when installing an the restraint for weight and height limits.
facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for infant or child restraint. • Carefully follow the instructions that come
children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg). with the restraint. If you install the restraint
“Convertible” child seats often have a higher (Continued)
improperly, it may not work when you need it.
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used

39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • All seating positions (except for driver) have the belt, disconnect the latch plate from the or the ISOFIX child restraint anchorage system
a automatic locking retractor. The seat belts buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert (Refer to ISOFIX — Child Seat Anchorage
are designed to keep the lap portion tight the latch plate into the buckle again. If you System).
around the child restraint so that it is not still cannot make the child restraint secure, The belt-positioning booster seat is for children
necessary to use a locking clip. For the seat try a different seating position. weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are
belt with the automatic locking retractor, pull • Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as still too small to fit the vehicle’s seat belts
the belt from the retractor until there is the manufacturer’s instructions tell you. properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent
enough to allow you to pass through the over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s
child restraint and slide the latch plate into back is against the seatback, they should use a
the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is fully WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
return to the retractor, pulling on the excess it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
webbing to tighten the lap portion around the from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
child restraint. For additional information, re- vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could Children Too Large for Booster Seats
fer to ⬙Automatic Locking Mode⬙. strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tight- serious personal injury.
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
ening the lap/shoulder belt on the child re- when their back is against the seatback, should
straint because the buckle or latch plate is Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
too close to the belt path opening on the
restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the and who are older than one year can ride • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing • The lap portion should be low on the hips
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch child seats and convertible child seats used in and as snug as possible.
plate into the buckle with the release button the forward-facing direction are for children
facing out. who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirm-
are older than one year. These child seats are ing or slouching can move the belt out of
• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt position.
pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens
40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, side, with each having a hook or connector for
move the child closer to the center of the attachment to the lower anchorage, and a WARNING!
vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoul- means for adjusting the tension of the strap. An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
der belt under an arm or behind the back. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some lead to increased head motion and possible
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be injury to the child. Use only the anchor posi-
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)
equipped with a tether strap having a hook for tion directly behind the child seat to secure a
To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt
attachment to the tether strap anchorage, and child restraint top tether strap.
from the retractor until there is enough to allow
a means for adjusting the tension of the strap.
you to pass through the child restraint and slide Universal Child Seat — Two-Door Models
the latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on
belt until it is all removed from the retractor. the lower and tether straps so that you can
Allow the belt to return into the retractor, pulling more easily attach the hook or connector to the Seating Position
on the excess webbing to tighten the lap por- lower and tether anchorages. The tether strap Front
Mass Group Rear
tion around the child restraint. Follow the in- should be routed under the center of the head Passen-
Outboard
structions of the child restraint manufacture. restraint and attached to the tether anchor on ger
the rear of the seatback. Then tighten all three 0 - Up to 10 kg X U
NOTE:
straps as you push the child restraint rearward 0+ - Up to 13 kg X U
To reset this feature you must let all of the and downward into the seat. I - 9 to 18 kg X U
belt webbing return into the retractor. You
Not all child restraint systems will be installed II - 15 to 25 kg X U
will not be able to pull out more webbing
until all of the webbing has been returned as we have described here. Again, carefully III - 22 to 36 kg X U
back into the retractor. follow the instructions that come with the child
restraint system.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of NOTE:
the manufacturer when installing your child If your child restraint seat is not ISOFIX-
restraint. Many, but not all, restraint systems will compatible, install the restraint using the
be equipped with separate straps on each vehicle seat belts.

41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Universal Child Seat — Four-Door Models X = Seat position not suitable for children in this vehicle’s seat belts. Child restraints having
Seating Position mass group. tether straps and hooks for connection to the
Front Rear top tether anchorages, have been available for
Mass Group Rear some time. For some older child restraints,
Passen- Out- WARNING!
Center An incorrectly anchored tether strap could many child restraint manufacturers offer
ger board
lead to increased head motion and possible add-on tether strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are
0 - Up to 10 kg X U U
urged to take advantage of all the available
0+ - Up to X U U injury to the child. Use only the anchor posi-
attachments provided with your child restraint
13 kg tion directly behind the child seat to secure a in any vehicle.
I - 9 to 18 kg X U U child restraint top tether strap.
II - 15 to 25 kg X U U NOTE:
III - 22 to 36 kg X U U ISOFIX — Child Seat Anchorage System When using the ISOFIX attaching system to
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the install a child restraint, please ensure that
Key of letters used in the table above: child restraint anchorage system called ISO- all seat belts not being used for occupant
U = Suitable for “universal” category restraints FIX. The ISOFIX system provides for the instal- restraints are stowed and out of reach of
approved for use in this mass group. lation of the child restraint without using the children. It is recommended that before in-
vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child stalling the child restraint, buckle the seat
UF = Suitable for forward-facing “universal” restraint using lower anchorages and upper belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the
category restraints approved for use in this tether straps from the child restraint to the child restraint and out of reach. If the buck-
mass group. vehicle structure. led seat belt interferes with the child re-
L = Suitable for particular child restraints given straint installation, instead of tucking the
ISOFIX-compatible child restraint systems are
on attached list. These restraints may be of the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the
now available. However, because the lower
“specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi- seat belt through the child restraint belt path
anchorages are to be introduced over a period and then buckle it. This should stow the seat
universal” categories. of years, child restraint systems having attach- belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
B = Built-in restraint approved for this mass ments for those anchorages will continue to
Remind all children in the vehicle that the
group. also have features for installation using the

42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 seat belts are not toys and should not be ISOFIX Child Seat – Two-Door Models (1) — For the child restraint systems (CRS)
played with, and never leave an unattended Size Seating Position which do not carry the ISO/XX size class iden-
child in the vehicle. Fixture tification (A to G), for the applicable mass
Class
Mass group, the manufacturer will indicate the ve-
The rear seating positions have lower anchor- Front Rear
Group hicle specific ISOFIX child restraint system(s)
ages that are capable of accommodating Pas- Out-
ISOFIX-compatible child seats having flexible, senger board recommended for each position.
webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child 0 - Up to E ISO/R1 X X Key of letters used in the table above:
seats with fixed lower attachments must be 10 kg (1) X X IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint
installed in the outboard positions only. Regard- E ISO/R1 X X systems of “universal” category approved for
less of the specific type of lower attachment, 0+ - Up D ISO/R2 X X use in the mass group.
never install ISOFIX-compatible child seats to 13 kg C ISO/R3 X X IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint
such that two seats share a common lower
anchorage. (1) X X systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These
D ISO/R2 X X ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”,
If you are installing ISOFIX-compatible child C ISO/R3 X X “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.
restraints in adjacent rear seating positions,
B ISO/F2 X IUF X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX
you can use the ISOFIX anchors or the vehi- I - 9 to
cle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you B1 ISO/ X IUF child restraint systems in this mass group
18 kg
must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center F2X and/or this size class.
position. If your child restraints are not ISOFIX- A ISO/F3 X IUF
compatible, you can only install the child re- (1) X X
straints using the vehicle’s seat belts. Please II - 15 to (1) X X
refer to “Installing The ISOFIX-Compatible 25 kg
Child Restraint System” for typical installation III - 22 to (1) X X
instructions. 36 kg

43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ISOFIX Child Seat – Four-Door Models hicle specific ISOFIX child restraint system(s) The rear seat lower anchorages
Size Fixture Seating Position recommended for each position. are round bars, located at the rear
Class of the seat cushion where it meets
Mass Key of letters used in the table above:
Group Front Rear Rear the seatback, and are visible when
Pas- Out- Cen- IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint you lean into the rear seat to install
senger board ter systems of “universal” category approved for the child restraint. You will easily
0 - Up E ISO/R1 X IUF X use in the mass group. feel them if you run your finger along the
to 10 kg (1) X X X
IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
E ISO/R1 X IUF X surfaces.
D ISO/R2 X X X systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These
0+ - Up
to 13 kg C ISO/R3 X X X ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”,
(1) X X X
“restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.
D ISO/R2 X X X X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX
C ISO/R3 X X X child restraint systems in this mass group
B ISO/F2 X IUF X and/or this size class.
I - 9 to
18 kg B1 ISO/ X IUF X Installing The ISOFIX-Compatible Child
F2X
Restraint System
A ISO/F3 X IUF X
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of
(1) X X X
the manufacturer when installing your child
II - 15 (1) X X X
to 25 kg restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here. Again, carefully ISOFIX Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
III - 22 (1) X X X
to 36 kg follow the installation instructions that were pro-
vided with the child restraint system.
(1) — For the child restraint systems (CRS)
which do not carry the ISO/XX size class iden-
tification (A to G), for the applicable mass
group, the manufacturer will indicate the ve-
44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 with each having a hook or connector for
attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means for adjusting the tension of the strap.
Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap having a hook for
attachment to the tether strap anchorage, and
a means for adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on
the lower straps and on the tether strap so that
ISOFIX Anchorages (Four-Door Models) Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models) you can more easily attach the hooks or con-
nectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages the lower hooks or connectors over the top of
behind each rear seating position located on the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat
the back of the seat. cover material. Then, locate the tether anchor-
age directly behind the seat where you are
placing the child restraint and attach the tether
strap to the anchorage, being careful to route
the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchor and the child restraint.
Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat, removing slack in the straps according to
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be
equipped with separate straps on each side,
45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 defines the seating positions with an Automatic 2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to
WARNING! Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch tighten the lap portion around the child re-
Improper installation of a child restraint to the plate. straint. Any seat belt system will loosen with
ISOFIX anchorages can lead to failure of an time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it
infant or child restraint. The child could be Driver Center Passen- tight if necessary.
badly injured or killed. Follow the manufactur- ger To attach a child restraint tether strap:
er’s directions exactly when installing an in- CRS CRS CRS Lock
fant or child restraint. Lock Lock
First Row ALR
Installing Child Restraints Using The Second ALR ALR ALR
Vehicle Seat Belt Row
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
Third Row
tions are equipped with an Automatic Locking
Retractor to secure a Child Restraint System Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
(CRS). These types of seat belts are designed 1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull
to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight enough of the seat belt webbing from the
around the child restraint so that it is not retractor to route it through the belt path of the
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will child restraint. Slide the latch plate into the Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire buckle until you hear a “click.” Next, extract all
belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
retract into the retractor. For additional informa- then allow the belt to retract into the retractor.
tion on ALR, refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” As the belt retracts, you will hear a ratcheting
description under “Seat Belts In Passenger sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in
Seating Positions” section. The chart below the Automatic Locking mode.

46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicles With Rear Web Buckles That May Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet
Need To Be Twisted harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tight-
ening the lap/shoulder belt on the child re- ENGINE BREAK-IN
straint because the buckle or latch plate is RECOMMENDATIONS
too close to the belt path opening on the A long break-in period is not required for the
restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt your vehicle.
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch
plate into the buckle with the release button Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models) facing out. (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling desirable.
Route the tether strap over the seatback and
and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt,
attach the hook to the tether anchor located on While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
disconnect the latch plate from the buckle,
the back of the seat. For the outboard seating within the limits of local traffic laws, contributes
turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
positions, route the tether under the head rest, to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle accel-
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t
and attach the hook to the tether anchor lo- eration in low gear can be detrimental and
make the child restraint secure, try a different
cated on the back of the seat. should be avoided.
seating position.
WARNING! Transporting Pets The engine oil installed in the engine at the
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent
lead to increased head motion and possible
about and possibly injured, or injure a passen- with anticipated climate conditions under
injury to the child. Use only the anchor posi- which vehicle operations will occur. For the
ger during panic braking or in an accident.
tions directly behind the child seat to secure a recommended viscosity and quality grades re-
child restraint top tether strap. fer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintain-

47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ing Your Vehicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE WARNING! confined areas any longer than needed to
USED. • Do not leave children or animals inside move your vehicle in or out of the area.
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
A new engine may consume some oil during its heat build-up may cause serious injury or If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera- the engine running, adjust your heating or
death.
tion. This should be considered a normal part cooling controls to force outside air into the
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
of the break-in and not interpreted as an indi- vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
cation of difficulty. area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
Additional Requirements For Diesel more likely to be seriously injured or killed. open, make sure that all windows are closed
Engine — If Equipped • Do not allow people to ride in any area of and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
During the first 1500 km avoid heavy loads, e.g. at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
driving at full throttle. Do not exceed 2/3 of the mode.
and seat belts.
maximum permissible engine speed for each • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a The best protection against carbon monoxide
gear. Change gear in good time. Do not shift entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
seat and using a seat belt properly.
down a gear manually in order to brake. tained engine exhaust system.
SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
Transporting Passengers be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
CARGO AREA. have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi-
scious and can eventually poison you. To tioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
avoid breathing (CO) follow these safety tips: could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
passenger compartment. In addition, inspect
48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 the exhaust system each time the vehicle is Defroster
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as Check operation by selecting the defrost mode WARNING! (Continued)
required. and place the blower control on high speed. • Never place or install floor mats or other
You should be able to feel the air directed floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be
Safety Checks You Should Make against the windshield. See your authorized properly secured to prevent them from
Inside The Vehicle dealer for service if your defroster is inoper- moving and interfering with the pedals or
Seat Belts able. the ability to control the vehicle.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking Floor Mat Safety Information • Never put floor mats or other floor cover-
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot ings on top of already installed floor mats.
must be replaced immediately. Do not disas- well of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that Additional floor mats and other coverings
semble or modify the system. leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are will reduce the size of the pedal area and
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of interfere with the pedals.
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must position and interfere with the pedals or impair • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis.
be replaced after a collision if they have been safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. Always properly reinstall and secure floor
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, mats that have been removed for cleaning.
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or WARNING! • Always make sure that objects cannot fall
retractor condition, replace the belt. Pedals that cannot move freely can cause into the driver foot well while the vehicle is
Airbag Warning Light loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of moving. Objects can become trapped un-
The light should come on and remain on for four serious personal injury. der the brake pedal and accelerator pedal
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the • Always make sure that floor mats are prop- causing a loss of vehicle control.
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is erly attached to the floor mat fasteners. • If required, mounting posts must be prop-
not lit during starting, see your authorized erly installed, if not equipped from the fac-
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes (Continued)
tory.
on while driving, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer. (Continued)

49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Lights
WARNING! (Continued) Have someone observe the operation of exte-
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation rior lights while you work the controls. Check
or mounting can cause interference with the turn signal and high beam indicator lights on
brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation the instrument panel.
causing loss of control of the vehicle.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and lock-
Periodic Safety Checks You Should ing.
Make OutsideThe Vehicle
Fluid Leaks
Tires Check area under vehicle after overnight park-
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and ing for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread. fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks
Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and are suspected, the cause should be located
cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. and corrected immediately.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper
pressure.

50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
YOUR VEHICLE
• MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
• Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
• Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
• Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
• Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
• Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
• Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
• Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
• Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
• Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
• VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
• Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
• Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
• SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
• Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
• Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped . . . . . . . 77
• Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
• Easy Entry Seats — Two Door Models . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
• Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two Door Models . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
• Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
• Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
• Fold and Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door Models . . . . . . 80
• Removing the Rear Seat — Two Door Models . . . . . . . . 81
• Replacing the Rear Seat — Two Door Models . . . . . . . . 81
• 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door Models . . . . . 82
• TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
• LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
• Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
• Headlights and Position Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
• Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
• Headlights with Wipers (Available with Automatic
Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
• Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
• Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
• Headlight Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
• Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
• Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
• Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
• Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
• Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
• Headlight Leveling System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 87
• WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
• Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
• Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
• Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
• Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
• TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
• ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . 90
• To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
• To Set a Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
• To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
• To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
• To Vary the Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
• To Accelerate for Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
• ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
• Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
• Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
• STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
• Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
• Rear Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
• DUAL TOP — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
• Removing the Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
• Installing the Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
• FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD TOP — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
• Front Panel(s) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
• Freedom Top™ Storage Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
• Front Panel(s) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
• Front Panel(s) Installation with Rear Hard Top Removed . 100
• Rear Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
• Rear Hard Top Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
• DOOR FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
• Door Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
• Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models . . . . . . . . 103
• Door Frame Installation — Four-Door Models . . . . . . . 104

54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • SOFT TOP — TWO DOOR MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
• Quick Steps to Lowering the Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
• Quick Steps to Raising the Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
• Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
• Raising the Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
• SOFT TOP (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
• Quick Steps for Lowering the Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . 120
• Quick Steps for Raising the Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
• Folding Down The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
• Putting Up The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
• SUNRIDER姞 (TWO-DOOR MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . 133
• Opening the Sunrider姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
• Closing the Sunrider姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
• SUNRIDER姞 (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . 135
• Opening the Sunrider姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
• Closing the Sunrider姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
• FOLDING WINDSHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
• Lowering the Windshield and Removing Side Bars . . . . 137
• Raising the Windshield and Replacing Side Bars . . . . . 139
• REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD TOP ONLY . . . . . . . 140
• Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 140
• Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 140
55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MIRRORS Outside Mirrors
WARNING!
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
Inside Day/Night Mirror mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas-
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal senger side convex mirror will look smaller
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
and vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror and farther away than they really are. Relying
inside mirror.
should be adjusted to center on the view too much on your passenger side mirror could
through the rear window. cause you to collide with another vehicle or
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the other object. Use your inside mirror when
small control under the mirror to the night judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The in the passenger side mirror.
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day
position (toward the windshield). Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located on the
center of the instrument panel, below the cli-
mate controls. A rotary knob selects the left
mirror, right mirror or off position.
Outside Rearview Mirror

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
* The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile
phone equipped with the Bluetooth姞
ⴖHands-Free Profile,ⴖ version 1.0 or higher.
See Uconnect™ website for supported
phones.
NOTE:
For Uconnect™ Phone customer support,
Power Mirror Switch visit the following websites:
Vanity Mirror
• www.chrysler.com/Uconnect
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED • www.dodge.com/Uconnect
same direction you want the mirror to move.
Use the center off position to guard against NOTE: • www.jeep.com/Uconnect
accidentally moving a mirror position. For Uconnect™ Phone with Navigation ra- Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls
Vanity Mirrors dio, refer to the Navigation radio Manual’s between the Uconnect™ Phone and your mo-
Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To (separate booklet) Uconnect™ Phone sec- bile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and
use the mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and tion. enables you to mute the Uconnect™ Phone’s
swing the mirror cover upward. Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands- microphone for private conversation.
free, in-vehicle communications system. The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to dial a phone Bluetooth姞 “Hands-Free profile” mobile phone.
number with your mobile phone* using simple Uconnect™ Phone features Bluetooth姞 tech-
voice commands (e.g., “Call”ѧ“Jim”ѧ “Work” or nology - the global standard that enables dif-
“Dial”ѧ“151-1234 -5555⬙). Your mobile phone’s ferent electronic devices to connect to each
audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s au- other without wires or a docking station, so
57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you enable you to access the system. When you the radio volume control knob or from the
stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, press the button you will hear the word steering wheel radio control, if so equipped.
pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep is The radio display will be used for visual
turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s your signal to give a command. prompts from the Uconnect™ Phone such as
Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone al- ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on certain radios.
lows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to NOTE:
the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile The driver side upper windshield trim con- Operation
phone can be used with the Uconnect™ Phone tains the microphone for the Uconnect™ Voice commands can be used to operate the
at a time. The Uconnect™ Phone is available in Phone. Uconnect™ Phone and to navigate through the
English, Dutch, French, German, Italian or Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone menu structure. Voice com-
Spanish languages (as equipped). Actual button location may vary mands are required after most Uconnect™
with radio. The individual buttons Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
WARNING! are described in the “Operation” specific command and then guided through
Any voice commanded system should be section. the available options.
used only in safe driving conditions following • Prior to giving a voice command, one must
local laws and phone use. All attention should wait for the beep, which follows the “Ready”
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with
be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do prompt or another prompt.
Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth姞 mobile
so may result in a collision causing serious phones. Some phones may not support all the • For certain operations, compound com-
injury or death. Uconnect™ Phone features. Refer to your mo- mands can be used. For example, instead of
bile service provider or the phone manufacturer saying “Setup” and then “Phone Pairing”, the
Uconnect™ Phone Button for details. following compound command can be said:
The radio or steering wheel con- “Setup Phone Pairing.”
trols (if equipped) will contain the The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with
two control buttons (Uconnect™ the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the • For each feature explanation in this section,
Phone button and Voice Uconnect™ Phone can be adjusted either from only the compound form of the voice com-
Command button) that will mand is given. You can also break the com-

58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 mands into parts and say each part of the Cancel Command • You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal
command when you are asked for it. For At any prompt, after the beep, you can say Identification Number (PIN), which you will
example, you can use the compound form “Cancel” and you will be returned to the main later need to enter into your mobile phone.
voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or menu. However, in a few instances the system You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will not
you can break the compound form com- will take you back to the previous menu. need to remember this PIN after the initial
mand into two voice commands: “Phone- Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone to a Mobile pairing process.
book” and “New Entry.” Please remember, Phone • For identification purposes, you will be
the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you prompted to give the Uconnect™ Phone a
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if must pair your compatible Bluetooth姞 enabled name for your mobile phone. Each mobile
speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ mobile phone (refer to “Introduction” section to phone that is paired should be given a
meters away from you. learn about the phone type). unique phone name.
Voice Command Tree To complete the pairing process, you will need • You will then be asked to give your mobile
Refer to “Voice Tree.” to reference your mobile phone owner’s phone a priority level between 1 and 7, with
Help Command manual. The Uconnect™ website may also 1 being the highest priority. You can pair up
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you provide detailed instructions for pairing. to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect™
want to know your options at any prompt, say The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any given time, only one
“Help” following the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone pairing instructions: mobile phone can be in use, connected to
Phone will play all the options at any prompt if your Uconnect™ System. The priority allows
you ask for help. • Press the button to begin. the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, • After the “Ready” prompt and the following
the vehicle at the same time. For example, if
simply press the button and follow the beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing”.
priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in
audible prompts for directions. All Uconnect™ • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a the vehicle, the Uconnect™ Phone will use
Phone sessions begin with a press of the Phone” and follow the audible prompts. the priority 3 mobile phone when you make a
button on the radio control head. call. You can select to use a lower priority

59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 mobile phone at any time (refer to “Ad- Doe”, where John Doe is a previously stored • When prompted, enter the number designa-
vanced Phone Connectivity”). name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook or tion (e.g., “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or
downloaded phonebook. To learn how to “Other”). This will allow you to store multiple
Dial by Saying a Number
store a name in the phonebook , refer to numbers for each phonebook entry, if de-
• Press the button to begin. “Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phone- sired.
book”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following • When prompted, recite the phone number
beep, say “Dial”. • The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the name for the phonebook entry that you are adding.
and then dial the corresponding phone num-
• The system will prompt you to say the num- After you are finished adding an entry into the
ber, which may appear in the display of
ber you want to call. phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to
certain radios. add more phone numbers to the current entry
• For example, you can say “151-1234-5555”.
Add Names to Your Uconnect™ or to return to the main menu.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the Phonebook The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter
phone number and then dial. The number
NOTE: up to 32 names in the phonebook with each
will appear in the display of certain radios.
Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phone- name having up to four associated phone
Call by Saying a Name book is recommended when the vehicle is numbers and designations. Each language has
• Press the button to begin. not in motion. a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following • Press the button to begin. and supported by your phone, Uconnect™
beep, say “Call”. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following Phone automatically downloads mobile
• The system will prompt you to say the name beep, say “Phonebook New Entry”. phone’s phonebook.
of the person you want to call. • When prompted, say the name of the new Phonebook Download – Automatic
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following entry. Use of long names helps the Voice Phonebook transfer from Mobile Phone
beep, say the name of the person you want Command and it is recommended. For ex- If equipped and specifically supported by your
to call. For example, you can say “John ample, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” in- phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatically down-
stead of “Bob”. loads names (text names) and number entries
60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific • Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is NOTE:
Bluetooth姞 Phones with Phone Book Access downloaded. SIM card phonebook is not • Phone handset must support Bluetooth姞
Profile may support this feature. See part of the mobile phonebook. OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. • This downloaded phonebook cannot be ed- use this feature.
• To call a name from downloaded (or ited or deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. • Some phones cannot send phonebook
Uconnect™) Phonebook, follow the proce- These can only be edited on the mobile entries if they are already connected to
dure in “Call by Saying a Name” section. phone. The changes are transferred and any system via Bluetooth姞, and you may
updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next see a message on the phone display that
• Automatic download and update, if sup-
phone connection. the Bluetooth姞 link is busy. In this case,
ported, begins as soon as the phone
the user must first disconnect or drop the
Bluetooth姞 wireless connection is made to Phonebook Download — Single Entry
Bluetooth姞 connection to the Uconnect™
the Uconnect™ Phone. For example, after If equipped and supported by your phone,
Phone, and then send the address book
you start the vehicle. Uconnect™ Phone allows the user to download
entry via Bluetooth姞. Please see your
• Maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be entries from their phone via Bluetooth姞. To use
phone Owners’ Manual for specific in-
this feature, press the button and say
downloaded and updated every time a structions on how to drop the Bluetooth姞
phone is connected to the Uconnect™ “Phonebook Download.” The system prompts connection.
Phone. “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth姞…” The system is now ready to ac- • If the phonebook entry is longer than 24
• Depending on the maximum number of en- cept phonebook entries from your phone using characters, it will only use the first 24
tries downloaded, there may be a short the Bluetooth姞 Object Exchange Profile characters.
delay before the latest downloaded names (OBEX). Please see your phone Owners’ Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
can be used. Until then, if available, the Manual for specific instructions on how to send Editing names in the phonebook is recom-
previously downloaded phonebook is avail- these entries from your phone. mended when the vehicle is not in motion.
able for use.
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries
• Only the phonebook of the currently con- cannot be deleted or edited.
nected mobile phone is accessible.
• Press the button to begin.
61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • After the “Ready” prompt and the following NOTE: • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries
beep, say “Phonebook Edit”. Editing phonebook entries is recommended cannot be deleted or edited.
• You will then be asked for the name of the when the vehicle is not in motion. Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook
phonebook entry that you wish to edit. Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry Entries
• Next, choose the number designation • Press the button to begin. • Press the button to begin.
(home, work, mobile, or other) that you wish
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following • After the “Ready” prompt and the following
to edit.
beep, say “Phonebook Delete”. beep, say “Phonebook Erase All”.
• When prompted, recite the new phone num-
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, • The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify
ber for the phonebook entry that you are
you will then be asked for the name of the that you wish to delete all the entries from the
editing.
entry that you wish to delete. You can either phonebook.
After you are finished editing an entry in the say the name of a phonebook entry that you • After confirmation, the phonebook entries
phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to wish to delete or you can say “List Names” to will be deleted.
edit another entry in the phonebook, call the hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
number you just edited, or return to the main from which you choose. To select one of the • Note that only the phonebook in the current
menu. entries from the list, press the button language is deleted.
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another while the Uconnect™ Phone is playing the • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries
phone number to a name entry that already desired entry and say “Delete”. cannot be deleted or edited.
exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry List All Uconnect™ Phonebook Names
John Doe may have a mobile and a home • After you enter the name, the Uconnect™
number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work Phone will ask you which designation you • Press the button to begin.
number later using the “Phonebook Edit” fea- wish to delete; home, work, mobile, other, or
all. Say the designation you wish to delete. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following
ture. beep, say “Phonebook List Names”.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the
current language is deleted.

62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Making a Second Call While Current Call in
of all the phonebook entries, including the Call Currently in Progress Progress
downloaded phonebook entries, if available. When you receive a call on your mobile phone, To make a second call while you are currently
• To call one of the names in the list, press the the Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle on a call, press the button and say “Dial”
button during the playing of the de- audio system, if on, and will ask if you would or “Call” followed by the phone number or
like to answer the call. Press the button to phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call
sired name, and say “Call”. accept the call. To reject the call, press and will be on hold while the second call is in
NOTE: hold the button until you hear a single progress. To go back to the first call, refer to
The user can also exercise “Edit” or “De- beep indicating that the incoming call was “Toggling Between Calls”. To combine two
lete” operations at this point. rejected. calls, refer to “Conference Call”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
as to the number designation you wish to Currently in Progress To put a call on hold, press the button until
call. If a call is currently in progress and you have you hear a single beep. This indicates that the
another incoming call, you will hear the same call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold,
• The selected number will be dialed. network tones for call waiting that you normally press and hold the button until you hear a
Phone Call Features hear when using your mobile phone. Press the single beep.
The following features can be accessed button to place the current call on hold and
through the Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) answer the incoming call. Toggling Between Calls
are available on your mobile service plan. For If two calls are in progress (one active and one
NOTE: on hold), press the button until you hear a
example, if your mobile service plan provides
The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones single beep indicating that the active and hold
three-way calling, this feature can be accessed
in the market today do not support rejecting status of the two calls have switched. Only one
through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
an incoming call when another call is in call can be placed on hold at one time.
your mobile service provider for the features
progress. Therefore, the user can only an-
that you have.
swer an incoming call or ignore it.

63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Conference Call Redial for a certain duration, after which the call is
When two calls are in progress (one active and automatically transferred from the
• Press the button to begin.
one on hold), press and hold the button Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
until you hear a double beep indicating that the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following • An active call is automatically transferred to
two calls have been joined into one conference beep, say “Redial”. the mobile phone after the ignition key is
call. • The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last num- switched to OFF.
Three-Way Calling ber that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Uconnect™ Phone Features
To initiate three-way calling, press the NOTE:
Language Selection
button while a call is in progress, and make a This may not be the last number dialed from To change the language that the Uconnect™
second phone call, as described under “Mak- the Uconnect™ Phone. Phone is using:
ing a Second Call While Current Call in Prog-
ress”. After the second call has established, Call Continuation • Press the button to begin.
press and hold the button until you hear a Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle • After the “Ready” prompt and the following
double beep, indicating that the two calls have beep, say the name of the language you
ignition key has been switched to OFF. Call
been joined into one conference call. wish to switch to (English, Dutch, French,
continuation functionality available on the ve-
Call Termination hicle can be any one of three types: German, Italian, or Spanish, if so equipped).
To end a call in progress, momentarily press • Continue to follow the system prompts to
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a
the button. Only the active call(s) will be complete language selection.
call can continue on the Uconnect™ Phone
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will either until the call ends, or until the vehicle
become the new active call. If the active call is After selecting one of the languages, all
battery condition dictates cessation of the prompts and voice commands will be in that
terminated by the phone far end, a call on hold call on the Uconnect™ Phone and transfer of
may not become active automatically. This is language.
the call to the mobile phone.
cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back NOTE:
from hold, press and hold the button until • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a
After every Uconnect™ Phone language
you hear a single beep. call can continue on the Uconnect™ Phone
change operation, only the language-
64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The • If supported, this number may be pro- NOTE:
paired phone name is not language-specific grammable on some systems. To do this, The Breakdown service number has to be
and usable across all languages. press the button and say “Setup”, setup before using. To setup, press the
For command translations and alternate com- followed by “Emergency”. button and say “Setup, Breakdown Service”
mands in supported languages, refer to “Com- • The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly and follow prompts.
mand Translations.” lower your chances of successfully mak- Paging
ing a phone call as to that for the mobile
Emergency Assistance — If Equipped To learn how to page refer to “Working with
phone directly.
If you are in an emergency and the mobile Automated Systems”. Paging works properly
phone is reachable: except for pagers of certain companies which
WARNING! time out a little too soon to work properly with
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an the Uconnect™ Phone.
emergency number for your area. emergency, your mobile phone must be:
Voice Mail Calling
If the phone is not reachable and the • turned on,
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to
Uconnect™ Phone is operational, you may • paired to the Uconnect™ System,
“Working with Automated Systems”.
reach the emergency number as follows: • and have network coverage.
Working with Automated Systems
• Press the button to begin.
This method is used in instances where one
Breakdown Service — If Equipped
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following If you need Breakdown service: generally has to press numbers on the mobile
beep, say “Emergency” and the Uconnect™ phone keypad while navigating through an
• Press the button to begin.
Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone automated telephone system.
to call the emergency number. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access
beep, say “Breakdown service”. a voice mail system or an automated service,
NOTE:
• The default number is 112. The number such as a paging service or automated cus-
dialed may not be applicable with the tomer service. Some services require immedi-
available mobile service and area.

65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ate response selection. In some instances, that will then send the corresponding phone num- Uconnect™ Phone will not repeat a phone
may be too quick for use of the Uconnect™ ber associated with the phonebook entry, as number before you dial it).
Phone. tones over the phone.
• Press the button to begin.
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ NOTE:
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
Phone that normally requires you to enter in a • You may not hear all of the tones due to beep, say:
touch-tone sequence on your mobile phone mobile phone network configurations;
keypad, you can press the button and this is normal. − “Setup Confirmations Prompts On”
say the sequence you wish to enter followed by • Some paging and voice mail systems − “Setup Confirmations Prompts Off”
the word “Send”. For example, if required to have system time out settings that are too
Phone and Network Status Indicators
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 short and may not allow the use of this
If available on the radio and/or on a premium
#), you can press the button and say, “3 feature.
display such as the instrument panel cluster,
7 4 6 # Send”. Saying a number, or sequence of Barge In - Overriding Prompts and supported by your mobile phone, the
numbers, followed by “Send”, is also to be The “Voice Command” button can be used Uconnect™ Phone will provide notification to
used for navigating through an automated cus- when you wish to skip part of a prompt and inform you of your phone and network status
tomer service center menu structure, and to issue your voice command immediately. For when you are attempting to make a phone call
leave a number on a pager. example, if a prompt is asking “Would you like using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given
You can also send stored Uconnect™ Phone- to pair a phone, clear aѧ,” you could press the for roaming, network signal strength, phone
book entries as tones for fast and easy access button and say, “Pair a Phone” to select battery strength, etc.
to voice mail and pager entries. To use this that option without having to listen to the rest of Dialing Using the Mobile Phone Keypad
feature, dial the number you wish to call and the voice prompt. You can dial a phone number with your mobile
then press the button and say “Send”. phone keypad and still use the Uconnect™
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
The system will prompt you to enter the name or Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the Phone (while dialing via the mobile phone
number and say the name of the phonebook system from confirming your choices (e.g., the keypad, the user must exercise caution and
entry you wish to send. The Uconnect™ Phone take precautionary safety measures). By dial-
ing a number with your paired Bluetooth姞 mo-
66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 bile phone, the audio will be played through • Press the button. List Paired Mobile Phone Names
your vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect™
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”. • Press the button to begin.
Phone will work the same as if you dial the
number using Voice Command. Advanced Phone Connectivity • After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing”.
NOTE: Transfer Call to and from Mobile Phone
Certain brands of mobile phones do not The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to • When prompted, say “List Phones”.
send the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone be transferred from your mobile phone to the • The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone
to play it on the vehicle audio system, so Uconnect™ Phone without terminating the call. names of all paired mobile phones in order
you will not hear it. Under this situation, To transfer an ongoing call from your from the highest to the lowest priority. To
after successfully dialing a number the user Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the “select” or “delete” a paired phone being
may feel that the call did not go through Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the announced, press the button and say
even though the call is in progress. Once button and say “Transfer Call”.
your call is answered, you will hear the “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two
audio. Connect or Disconnect Link Between the sections for an alternate way to “select” or
Uconnect™ Phone and Mobile Phone “delete” a paired phone.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will Your mobile phone can be paired with many Select Another Mobile Phone
still be able to hear the conversation coming different electronic devices, but can only be This feature allows you to select and start using
from the other party, but the other party will not actively connected with one electronic device another phone paired with the Uconnect™
be able to hear you. In order to mute the at a time. Phone.
Uconnect™ Phone: If you would like to connect or disconnect the • Press the button to begin.
• Press the Bluetooth姞 connection between a Uconnect™
button.
Phone paired mobile phone and the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following
Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions de- beep, say “Setup Select Phone” and follow
• Following the beep, say “Mute”. the prompts.
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:

67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • You can also press the button at any Things You Should Know About when the vehicle is parked with the engine
time while the list is being played, and then Your Uconnect™ Phone running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
choose the phone that you wish to select. switched OFF.
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
• The selected phone will be used for the next To hear a brief tutorial of the Uconnect™ Phone This procedure may be repeated with a new
phone call. If the selected phone is not features, press the button and say user. The system will adapt to the last trained
available, the Uconnect™ Phone will return “Uconnect™ Tutorial”. voice only.
to using the highest priority phone present in Voice Training To restore the Voice Command system to fac-
or near (approximately within 30 ft [9 m]) the For users experiencing difficulty with the tory default settings, enter the Voice Training
vehicle. Uconnect™ Phone recognizing their voice session via the above procedure and follow the
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile commands or numbers, the Uconnect™ Phone prompts.
Phones Voice Training feature may be used. To enter Voice Command
this training mode, follow one of the two follow-
• Press the button to begin. • For best performance, adjust the rearview
ing procedures:
mirror to provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode between the overhead console (if equipped)
beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing”. (e.g., from radio mode) and the mirror.
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow • Press and hold the button for five • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
the prompts.
seconds until the session begins, or, • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
• You can also press the button at any
• Press the button and say the “Setup, would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
time while the list is being played, and then meters away from you.
choose the phone you wish to delete. Voice Training” command.
• Make sure that no one other than you is
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted speaking during a Voice Command period.
by the Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the
Voice Training session should be completed • Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo,
• low road noise, “800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not and loudness to a large degree rely on the
“eight hundred”. phone and network, and not the Uconnect™
• smooth road surface, Phone.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• fully closed windows, • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be
• Even though international dialing for most
• dry weather conditions. reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio
number combinations is supported, some
volume.
• Even though the system is designed for shortcut dialing number combinations may
users speaking in European English, Dutch, not be supported. • In a convertible vehicle, system perfor-
mance may be compromised with the con-
French, German, Italian, or Spanish accents, • In a convertible vehicle, system perfor-
the system may not always work for some. mance may be compromised with the con- vertible top down.
• When navigating through an automated sys- vertible top down. Bluetooth姞 Communication Link
tem such as voice mail, or when sending a Mobile phones have been found to lose con-
Phone Far End Audio Performance
page, at the end of speaking the digit string, nection to the Uconnect™ Phone. When this
• Audio quality is maximized under: happens, the connection can generally be re-
make sure to say “Send”.
• low-to-medium blower setting, established by switching the phone off/on. Your
• Storing names in the phonebook when the mobile phone is recommended to remain in
vehicle is not in motion is recommended. • low-to-medium vehicle speed, Bluetooth姞 ON mode.
• It is not recommended to store similar sound- • low road noise, Power-Up
ing names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook. After switching the ignition key from OFF to
• smooth road surface,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ either ON or ACC position, or after a language
• fully closed windows, change, you must wait at least five seconds
Phone Local) name recognition rate is opti-
mized when the entries are not similar. • dry weather conditions, and prior to using the system.
• operation from the driver seat.

69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Voice Commands Voice Commands Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
zero download pager beeper
one Dutch Nederlands pair a phone
two edit phone pairing pairing
three emergency phonebook phonebook
four English previous
five delete all erase all redial
six Espanol select phone select
seven Francais send
eight German Deutsch set up phone settings or
nine help phone set up
asterisk (*) star home transfer call
plus (+) Italian Italiano Uconnect™ Tutorial
hash (#) language try again
all all of them list names voice training system training
Breakdown service list phones work
call main menu. return to main menu yes
cancel mobile
confirmation prompts. confirmation mute on
continue mute off
delete new entry
dial no

73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED When you press the Voice Command These commands are universal and can be
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your used from any menu. All other commands can
Voice Command System Operation be used depending upon the active applica-
signal to give a command.
This Voice Command system al- tion.
lows you to control your AM, FM NOTE:
When using this system, you should speak
radio, disc player, and a memo If you do not say a command within a few clearly and at a normal speaking volume.
recorder. seconds, the system will present you with a
list of options. The system will best recognize your speech if
the windows are closed, and the heater/air
NOTE: If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it conditioning fan is set to low.
Take care to speak into the Voice Interface lists options, press the Voice Command
At any point, if the system does not recognize
System as calmly and normally as possible. button, listen for the beep, and say your com- one of your commands, you will be prompted to
The ability of the Voice Interface System to mand. repeat it.
recognize user voice commands may be
Pressing the Voice Command button To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level. while the system is speaking is known as Command button and say “Help” or
“barging in.” The system will be interrupted, “Main Menu”.
WARNING! and after the beep, you can add or change
Any voice commanded system should be commands. This will become helpful once you Commands
start to learn the options. The Voice Command system understands two
used only in safe driving conditions following
NOTE: types of commands. Universal commands are
local laws. All attention should be kept on the available at all times. Local commands are
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in At any time, you can say the words “Can- available if the supported radio mode is active.
a collision causing serious injury or death. cel”, “Help” or “Main Menu”.

74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing the Volume Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Disc
Medium Wave — If Equipped) To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio mode, you may say the following commands:
Command button.
AM”. In this mode, you may say the following
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to • “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
adjust the volume to a comfortable level while • “Next Station” (to select the next station)
the Voice Command system is speaking. • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Please note the volume setting for Voice Com- • “Previous Station” (to select the previous
station) Memo
mand is different than the audio system.
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say
Main Menu • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) “Memo”. In this mode, you may say the follow-
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) ing commands:
Command button. You may say “Main
Radio FM • “New Memo” (to record a new memo) —
Menu” to switch to the main menu. To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio During the recording, you may press the
In this mode, you can say the following com- FM”. In this mode, you may say the following Voice Command button to stop re-
mands: commands: cording. You proceed by saying one of the
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode) • “Frequency” (to change the frequency) following commands:

• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode) • “Next Station” (to select the next station) − “Save” (to save the memo)

• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder) • “Previous Station” (to select the previous − “Continue” (to continue recording)
station) − “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded In this mode, you may say the following com- 1. Press the Voice Command button,
memos) — During the playback you may mands: say “System Setup” and once you are in that
press the Voice Command button to
• “Language English” menu then say “Voice Training.” This will train
stop playing memos. You proceed by saying your own voice to the system and will improve
• “Language French”
one of the following commands: recognition.
• “Language Spanish”
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) 2. Repeat the words and phrases when
• “Language Dutch” prompted by Uconnect™ Voice. For best re-
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Language Deutsch” sults, the Voice Training session should be
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo) completed when the vehicle is parked, engine
• “Language Italian” running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Tutorial” switched off. This procedure may be repeated
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos) with a new user. The system will adapt to the
• “Voice Training” last trained voice only.
System Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say on of NOTE:
the following:
SEATS
Keep in mind that you have to press the Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
• “Change to system setup” Voice Command button first and wait System of the vehicle.
• “Main menu system setup” for the beep before speaking the “Barge In”
commands. WARNING!
• “Switch to system setup”
Voice Training • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
• “Change to setup” For users experiencing difficulty with the sys- inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
• “Main menu setup” or tem recognizing their voice commands or num- people riding in these areas are more likely
bers the Uconnect™ Voice “Voice Training” to be seriously injured or killed.
• “Switch to setup”
feature may be used.
(Continued)

76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or low-
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
ered by using the ratcheting handle, located on
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on
in these areas are more likely to be seri- the handle to raise the seat; push downward on
ously injured or killed. the handle to lower the seat.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.

Front Seat Adjustment Manual Seat Adjustment

The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward
by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor. While sitting in the seat, WARNING!
lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dan-
and move the seat forward or rearward. Re- gerous. Moving a seat while driving could
lease the bar once you have reached the result in loss of control which could cause a
desired position. Then, using body pressure, collision and serious injury or death.
move forward and rearward on the seat to be • Seats should be adjusted before fastening Seat Height Adjustment
sure that the seat adjusters have latched. the seatbelts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seatbelt.

77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Front Seatback Recline Easy Entry Seats — Two Door Models To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate the
Lean forward before lifting the handle, then Pull upward on the recline lever (toward the rear seatback upright until it locks and push the seat
lean back to the desired position and release of the vehicle) and slide the entire seat forward. rearward until the track locks.
the handle. Lift the handle to return the seat- NOTE:
back to an upright position.
• The front passenger seats have a track
memory, which returns the seat to just
past the halfway point of the track regard-
less of its original position.
• The recliner and easy entry levers should
not be used during the automatic return-
ing of the seat to its sitting position.
Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two Door
Easy Entry Lever Models
This feature allows the front seats to be rotated
toward the instrument panel to allow easier
Recline Lever
entry into the rear seats.

WARNING! Driver and Passenger Seats

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that In addition to Easy Entry, the driver and pas-
senger seats are also equipped with Tip n’
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
Slide. This feature allow for easier entry for rear
your chest. In a collision you could slide under passengers.
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death. Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the
seat the entire seat forward (Easy Entry).
Easy Entry Seat
78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 With the seat forward, pull the entire seat as- the first four minutes of operation. Then, the
sembly toward the instrument panel. heat output will drop to the normal HIGH-level. WARNING! (Continued)
If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system • Do not place anything on the seat that
Heated Seats — If Equipped will automatically switch to LOW-level after ap- insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
On some models, the front driver and passen- proximately 30 minutes of continuous opera- cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
ger seats may be equipped with heaters in both overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been
tion. At that time, the number of illuminated
the seat cushions and seatbacks. LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the overheated could cause serious burns due
There are two heated seat switches that allow change. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF to the increased surface temperature of the
the driver and passenger to operate the seats automatically after approximately 30 minutes. seat.
independently. The controls for each seat are NOTE:
located on a switch bank near the bottom
center of the instrument panel. When a heat setting is selected, heat will be CAUTION!
felt within two to five minutes. Repeated overheating of the seat could dam-
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat
age the heating element and/or degrade the
settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch
WARNING! material of the seat.
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and
none for OFF. skin because of advanced age, chronic Head Restraints
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi- Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
Press the switch once to select cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or other of injury by restricting head movement in the
HIGH-level heating. Press the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
physical condition must exercise care when
switch a second time to select be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
LOW-level heating. Press the using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if is located above the top of your ear.
switch a third time to shut the heat-
ing elements OFF. used for long periods of time.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the (Continued)
heater will provide a boosted heat level during

79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat — Two
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be Door Models
properly adjusted prior to operating the ve- NOTE:
hicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints • Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be
should never be adjusted while the vehicle is necessary to reposition the front seats.
in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head • Be sure that the front seats are fully
restraints improperly adjusted or removed upright and positioned forward. This will
could cause serious injury or death in the allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
event of a collision. 1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the
Adjustment Button seatback forward.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the NOTE:
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, The rear head restraints are not adjustable.
press the adjustment button, located on the
base of the head restraint, and push downward To remove the head restraint, pull upward on
on the head restraint. the head restraint to it’s highest position, push
in both buttons at the base of each head
restraint rod, and simultaneously pull up on the
head restraint.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable
head restraints. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” Rear Seat Release
in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for information on child seat tether rout- 2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
ing.

80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
Folding Rear Seat
be sure that the seats are fully latched.
Release Bar Location
3. Return the seat to the normal position. 1. Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1
through 3 under “Fold and Tumble Rear Seat” Replacing the Rear Seat — Two
4. Raise the rear seatback using the assist in this section. Door Models
strap and firmly lock the seat into position. Reverse the steps for removing the seat.
2. Press down on the release bar on each side,
Removing the Rear Seat — Two and pull the seat out and away from the lower
Door Models bracket. WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury,
3. Remove the seat from the vehicle. passengers should not be seated in the
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo rear cargo area with the rear seat folded
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a down or removed from the vehicle.
collision, people riding in these areas are • The rear cargo space is intended for load
more likely to be seriously injured or killed. carrying purposes only, not for passengers
who should sit in seats and use seat belts.
(Continued)
81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — To Raise the Rear Seat
WARNING! (Continued) Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If
Four Door Models • Do not allow people to ride in any area of
To provide additional storage area, each rear interference from the cargo area prevents the
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats seatback from fully locking, you will have diffi-
seat can be folded flat to allow for extended
cargo space and still maintain some rear seat- and seat belts. culty returning the seat to its proper position.
ing room. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
NOTE:
seat and using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be To Fold Down the Rear Seat center shoulder belt will not be able to be
necessary to reposition the front seat to Locate the pull strap (lower outboard side of extended for use. If you cannot extend the
its mid-track position. seat), and pull it toward you until the seatback center shoulder belt, make sure your seat-
back is fully latched.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully releases.
upright and positioned forward. This will
allow the rear seat to fold down easily. WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
WARNING! locked into position. If the seatback in not
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo securely locked into position the seat will not
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a provide the proper stability for child seats
collision, people riding in these areas are and/or passengers. An improperly latched
more likely to be seriously injured or killed. seat could cause serious injury.

(Continued)
Pull Strap

82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Headlights and Position Lights
WARNING!
Release both the hood latches. Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
detent for position lights and instrument panel
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it lights. Turn to the second detent for headlight
could open when the vehicle is in motion and operation.
block your vision. Failure to follow this warn-
NOTE:
ing could result in serious injury or death.
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as
LIGHTS atmospheric conditions change to allow the
Multifunction Lever condensation to change back into a vapor.
The multifunction lever controls the operation of Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate
the position lights, headlights, headlight beam the clearing process.
Hood Latch selection, passing lights (flash-to-pass), fog
lights (if equipped), instrument panel light dim-
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, ming and turn signals. The lever is located on
located in the middle of the hood opening. the left side of the steering column.
Push the latch to the left side of the vehicle, to
open the hood. You may have to push down
slightly on the hood before pushing the safety
latch. Insert the support rod into the slot on the
hood.
To close the hood, remove the support rod from
the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip.
Headlight Switch
Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood
latches. Multifunction Lever

83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Headlights — If Equipped NOTE:
This system automatically turns the headlights The engine must be running before the
on or off according to ambient light levels. To headlights will turn on in the Automatic
turn the system on, turn the end of the multi- mode.
function lever to the AUTO position (third de-
tent). When the system is on, the Headlight Headlights with Wipers (Available
Time Delay feature is also on. This means the with Automatic Headlights Only)
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds When this feature is active, the headlights will
after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK turn on approximately 10 seconds after the
position. To turn the Automatic System off, turn wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is
the end of the multifunction lever out of the placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are Turn Signal Operation
AUTO position.
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE:
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be • If either light remains on and does not
turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle flash, or there is a very fast flash rate,
Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer check for a defective outside light bulb. If
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center an indicator fails to light when the lever is
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in moved, it would suggest that the indicator
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur- bulb is defective.
ther information.
• A tone will chime if the turn signals are
Turn Signals left on for more than 1 mile (2 km).
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
Headlight Switch the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.

84

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Lane Change Assist Front Fog Lights — If Equipped Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving The front fog light switch is in the To activate the rear fog lights, turn on
beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or multifunction lever. To activate the front the front position lights or headlights,
left) will flash three times then automatically turn fog lights, turn on the position lights or pull out the end of the multifunction
off. headlights and pull out the end of the lever and rotate the lever to the last
Lights-On Reminder lever. detent.
If the headlights or parking lights are on after Instrument Panel Dimmer
the ignition is turned OFF, the high beam indi- Rotate the center portion of the lever to the
cator light will remain illuminated and a chime extreme bottom position to fully dim the instru-
will sound when the driver’s door is opened. ment panel lights and prevent the interior lights
Headlight Dimmer Switch from illuminating when a door is opened.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to Rotate the center portion of the lever up to
switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the increase the brightness of the instrument panel
lever toward you to switch the headlights back lights when the parking lights or headlights are
to low beam. on.
Flash-To-Pass Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
You can signal another vehicle with your head- Fog Light Operation
the next detent position to brighten the odom-
lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever eter and radio when the parking lights or head-
toward the steering wheel. This will turn on the lights are on.
high beam headlights until the lever is re-
leased.

85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to Cargo Lamp The rear cargo light may be turned on by
the last detent to turn on the interior lighting. The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time
the front doors are opened, by rotating the to turn the light off.
control for the dimmer switch on the multifunc-
tion lever fully upward, or if equipped, when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
The sports bar reading lights (available on
four-door models) can be turned on by press-
ing the switches, located on either side of the
lens. Press a switch a second time to turn the
light off.
Dimmer Control
Rear Cargo Light
Interior Lights
The overhead light will come on when a door is When a door is open and the interior lights are
opened. It may also be turned on by rotating on, rotating the dimmer control to the extreme
the control for the dimmer switch on the multi- bottom position will cause all the interior lights
function lever fully upward. to turn off. This is also known as the “Party”
mode because it allows the doors to stay open
The overhead light will automatically turn off in for extended periods of time without discharg-
approximately 10 minutes if a door is left open ing the vehicle’s battery.
or the dimmer control is left in the dome light
position. Turn the ignition switch ON to restore Sports Bar Reading Light
the overhead light operation.

86

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Headlight Leveling System — If 0 Driver only, or driver and front pas- WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
Equipped senger. WASHERS
This system allows the driver to maintain proper 1 All seating positions occupied. The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
headlight beam position with the road surface 2 All seating positions occupied, plus located on the right side of the steering column.
regardless of vehicle load. The headlight level- an evenly distributed load in the The front wipers are operated by rotating a
ing switch is located on the lower switch bank luggage compartment. The total switch, located at the end of the lever. For
(below the climate controls). weight of passengers and load information on using the rear window wiper/
To operate: With the low beams on, does not exceed the maximum load washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
capacity of the vehicle. “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle”.
push the upper side or lower side
of the headlight leveling switch un- 3 Driver, plus an evenly distributed
til the appropriate number, which load in the luggage compartment.
corresponds to the load listed on The total weight of the driver and
the following chart, illuminates on load does not exceed the maximum
the switch. load capacity of the vehicle.
NOTE: Calculations based on a passenger weight of
165 lbs (75 kg).
Headlight Leveling will not activate when the
parking lights or high beam headlights are
on.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
second detent past the intermittent settings for
low-speed wiper operation. switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
detent past the intermittent settings for high-
freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
speed wiper operation.
motor may occur when the vehicle is re-
started.

Intermittent Wiper System Front Wiper Control

Use the intermittent wiper when weather con-
ditions make a single wiping cycle, with a NOTE:
variable pause between cycles, desirable. Ro- The wiper delay times depend on vehicle
tate the end of the lever to the first detent speed. If the vehicle is moving less than
position for one of five intermittent settings. The 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be
delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to doubled.
18 seconds.
Front Wiper Control
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the delay range, the wiper will start and
continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles
after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.

88

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wheel, move the steering column up or down,
wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles as desired. Pull upwards on the lever to lock the
and then turn off. column firmly in place.

WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
shield could lead to a collision. You might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid
sudden icing of the windshield during freezing
weather, warm the windshield with defroster
before and during windshield washer use. Mist Control

NOTE:
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a The mist feature does not activate the Tilt Steering Column Lever
single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held be sprayed on the windshield. The wash
function must be used in order to spray the WARNING!
down, the wipers will continue to operate. Do not adjust the steering column while driv-
windshield with washer fluid.
ing. Adjusting the steering column while driv-
TILT STEERING COLUMN ing or driving with the steering column un-
This feature allows you to tilt the steering col- locked, could cause the driver to lose control
umn upward or downward. The tilt lever is of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column is
located on the steering column, below the turn
locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to
signal lever.
follow this warning may result in serious injury
Push down on the lever to unlock the steering or death.
column. With one hand firmly on the steering
89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed press the SET (-) button and release. Release
IF EQUIPPED Control System can be reactivated by push- the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control ing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF the selected speed.
takes over accelerator operations at speeds button and resetting the desired vehicle set NOTE:
greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). speed.
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are lo- To Activate speed and on level ground before pressing
cated on the right side of the steering wheel. Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator the SET button.
Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a To Deactivate
second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
off. The system should be turned off when not in CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure
use. while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Elec-
tronic Speed Control without erasing the set
speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or
WARNING! turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system speed memory.
on when not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go To Resume Speed
faster than you want. You could lose control To resume a previously set speed, push the
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES + RES (+) button and release. Resume can be
and have a collision. Always leave the system
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET - used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
OFF when you are not using it.
NOTE: To Vary the Speed Setting
To Set a Desired Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When can increase speed by pushing the RES (+)
Electronic Speed Control System has been
the vehicle has reached the desired speed, button. If the button is continually pressed, the
designed to shut down if multiple Speed
Control functions are operated at the same
90

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 set speed will continue to increase until the Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
button is released, then the new set speed will The transmission may downshift on hills to There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power
be established. maintain the vehicle set speed. outlets that can provide power for accessories
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a NOTE: designed for use with the standard power outlet
1 mph (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each adapters. The front power outlet, located in the
The Electronic Speed Control system main-
subsequent tap of the button results in an lower portion of the instrument panel, has a
tains speed up and down hills. A slight
increase of 1 mph (2 km/h). snap-on plastic cap so that it can be covered
speed change on moderate hills is normal.
when not in use.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the When the optional cigar lighter heating element
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
button is continually held in the SET (-) position, is used in the power outlet, it heats when
Electronic Speed Control.
the set speed will continue to decrease until the pushed in and pops out automatically when
button is released. Release the button when the ready for use. To preserve the heating ele-
WARNING! ment, do not hold the lighter in the heating
desired speed is reached, and the new set
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous position.
speed will be established.
where the system cannot maintain a constant
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the
1 mph (2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each conditions, and you could lose control and
subsequent tap of the button results in a de-
have a collision. Do not use Electronic Speed
crease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
To Accelerate for Passing winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.

91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer,
there is a power outlet located in the right rear WARNING! (Continued)
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt cargo area.
electric shock and failure.
(13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse
protecting the system will need to be re-
placed. CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
WARNING! degrade the battery even more quickly.
Front Power Outlet To avoid serious injury or death: Only use these intermittently and with
• Only devices designed for use in this type greater caution.
The front power outlet is powered from the
of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
ignition switch. Power is available when the (Continued)
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. outlet.
Items plugged into this power outlet may dis- • Do not touch with wet hands.
charge the battery and/or prevent the engine • Close the lid when not in use and while
from starting. driving the vehicle.
(Continued)

92

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STORAGE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high-power draw accesso- Console Storage Compartment
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being To lock or unlock the storage compartment,
started (with accessories still plugged in), insert the ignition key and turn. To open the
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient storage compartment, press the latch and lift
length of time to allow the alternator to the cover.
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of acces-
sory or accessory bracket from the plug. Front Cupholders

Rear Cupholders
CUPHOLDERS The rear cupholders are located on the back of
Front Cupholders the center console.
The front cupholders are located in the center
console.
Center Console

Rear Cupholders
93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Storage Compartment DUAL TOP — IF EQUIPPED • Two Sunrider姞 secure straps (if
The rear cargo area storage compartment If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you equipped)
cover is held by a spring-loaded latch. In order must remove one of the tops from the ve- • Two rear swing gate brackets
to remove the rear storage compartment cover, hicle. If the soft top is removed, the pivot
use the following procedure: brackets must also be removed from the 2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top
sport bar. The soft top was installed at the Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear
NOTE: Panel Removal” in this section.
factory for shipping purposes only. The soft
The rear storage compartment latch should top and the hard top are to be used indepen- 3. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot
not be used as cargo tie-down. dently. Removal is mandatory to prevent any bracket screws (two per side) using a #T30
1. Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular possible wear and tear on the soft top. Your Torx姞 head driver.
(straight up) to the top surface of the tray. vehicle warranty will not cover damage result-
ing from both tops remaining on the vehicle at
2. Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees, the same time for extended periods of time.
so it is parallel to the slotted hole in the tray.
3. Open the rear compartment cover.
Removing the Soft Top
1. Locate and remove the two boxes that con-
tain the following items:
• Right and left door frames
• Door frame attachment knobs (four for
two-door models, six for four-door mod-
els)
4. Disconnect the knuckles from the left and
• Right and left quarter windows right metal pivot brackets. Remove the soft top
• Rear window from the vehicle and store in a clean, dry
location.
• Two rear window roll up straps
Rear Storage Cover
94

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: 1. Locate and remove the following items prior
To aid in disconnecting the knuckles, you to hard top removal:
may carefully tap on the knuckles using a • Right and left door frames
rubber mallet.
• Door frame attachment knobs (four for two-
door models, six for four-door models)
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top
Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear
6. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Panel Removal” in this section.
Top Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/
Rear Panel Installation” in this section. 3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section.
Installing the Soft Top
5. Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to
NOTE:
expose the pivot brackets. Remove the brack-
ets using a #T30 Torx姞 head driver. Recover The following procedures are for first time
and re-zip the sports bar cover. Store the pivot set up only. For future soft top procedures,
brackets and screws in a safe place. refer to “Soft Top” in this section.

95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. If the soft top has been removed, follow NOTE:
these steps to reinstall the soft top. If the soft To aid in reattaching the knuckles, you may
top is on the vehicle, proceed to step #5. carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber
a. If the pivot brackets have been removed, mallet.
unzip the sport bar covers and attach the
pivot brackets to the sports bar with the four
screws that were removed using a #T30
Torx姞 head driver. Re-cover and re-zip the
sport bar covers.

CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip
the screws if they are overtightened.

d. Screw the pivot screws back into place 5. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar
using a #T30 Torx姞 head driver. Secure them for bottom of rear window) and set aside.
until they are snug, being careful not to
cross-thread the screws or overtighten. NOTE:
Be sure the wire harness in the left rear
b. Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle corner is not tangled in the soft top bows
with the bows pointing forward and the before you lift the top.
curved portion of the bows facing upward. 6. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover.
c. Reattach the knuckles onto the metal This cover should be discarded. It was in-
pivot brackets. tended as a protective cover for shipping only.

96

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: Front Panel(s) Removal
CAUTION!
A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the Failure to follow these cautions may cause NOTE:
dual top wrap.
interior water damage, stains or mildew: Left panel must be removed before remov-
7. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — • It is recommended that the top be free of ing right panel.
Putting Up the Soft Top” in this section. water prior to panel removal. Removing the 1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to the
top, opening a door or lowering a window side.
FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE
while the top is wet may allow water to drip
MODULAR HARD TOP — IF 2. Turn the rear fasteners (knobs) (located on
into the vehicles interior.
EQUIPPED the overhead speaker bar assembly) counter-
• The hard top assembly must be positioned
clockwise until they can be removed.
properly to ensure sealing. Improper instal-
CAUTION!
lation can cause water to leak into the
• The hard top is not designed to carry any
vehicles interior.
additional loads such as roof racks, spare
• Careless handling and storage of the re-
tires, building, hunting, or camping sup-
movable roof panels may damage the
plies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not
seals, causing water to leak into the ve-
designed as a structural member of the
hicles interior.
vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry any • The front panel(s) must be positioned prop-
additional loads other than environmental erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
(rain, snow, etc.). can cause water to leak into the vehicles
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has
interior.
been either fully attached to the windshield
frame and bodyside, or fully removed.

97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) from 5. Unlatch the header panel latch located at Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and
the center of the roof panel. the top of the windshield. hooks are facing downward. Unzip the bag and
fold back the outer flap. Release the Velcro on
the black panel divider and fold it back.
NOTE:
Ensure the front Freedom Top™ panel latch
is closed prior to inserting the panel into the
Freedom bag.
Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag
with the latches facing downward.

4. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located above 6. Remove the left-hand panel.
the shoulder belt anchorage).
To remove the right panel, follow the steps
above except for Step 3.
Freedom Top™ Storage Bag
Your vehicle comes with a Freedom Top™
storage bag that allows you to store your Free-
dom Top™ panels. The storage bag contains
two compartments and fits behind the rear
seat.

98

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the
divider is laying flat). Secure the Velcro, located
at the center of the divider.

Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the
closed. hooks and straps facing the back of the rear
seat. Attach the clips at the bottom of the bag to
Insert the left-side Freedom panel into the bag the child restraint anchorages, located at the
with the latches facing upward. base of the rear seat.
NOTE:
Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is
closed prior to inserting the panel into the
bag.

Install the seat attachment strap (at the top of

the bag) through the loops.

99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Wrap the upper strap around the rear head Front Panel(s) Installation with Rear 3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps
restraints and loop the strap through the Hard Top Removed for removal in reverse order.
buckle. Pull on the strap to tighten the Freedom
bag securely against the rear seat. 1. Turn the left and right panels over and move Rear Hard Top Removal
the spacer block (located on the rear of the 1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front
panel) upward 90 degrees. Panel(s) Removal” in this section.
2. Open both doors.
3. Remove the two Torx姞 head screws that
secure the hard top at the B-pillar (near the top
of the door) using a #40 Torx姞 head driver
(Four–Door Only).
4. Remove the six Torx姞 head screws that
secure the hard top to the vehicle (along the
interior bodyside) using a #40 Torx姞 head
Front Panel(s) Installation driver.
NOTE: NOTE: 5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure
Set the panels on the windshield frame so clearance of the rear window glass. Lift the rear
The front panel(s) must be positioned prop-
that there is no overhang. Also, make sure window glass.
erly to ensure sealing. Set the panels on the
that the panels are sitting flush with the windshield frame so that there is no over-
body. hang. Also, make sure that the panels are
1. Install the right panel first, then the left panel. sitting flush with the body.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps 2. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
for removal in reverse order.

100

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. Locate the wire harness on the left rear 8. To remove the wiring harness press the tab 10. Close the swing gate.
inside corner of the vehicle. and pull to disconnect. 11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle.
Place the hard top on a soft surface to prevent
damage.

CAUTION!
The removal of the Freedom Top requires four
adults located on each corner. Failure to fol-
low this caution could damage the Freedom
Top.

7. Release the red locking tab by pulling out- 9. To remove the washer hose, pinch the grips
ward. on hose connector and pull.

101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rear Hard Top Installation DOOR FRAME Door Frame Removal
NOTE: 1. Unscrew and remove the door frame attach-
If the door frames are installed from soft top WARNING! ment knobs (two per door).
usage, they must be removed prior to instal- Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with
lation of the hard top. the door frame(s) removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This proce-
1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and
dure is furnished for use during off-road op-
replace if necessary.
eration only.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for
removal in reverse order.
CAUTION!
Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with Failure to follow these cautions may cause
the body at the sides and check to ensure that interior water damage, stains or mildew:
there is a uniform gap between the lift glass • Opening a door or lowering a window while
and hard top.
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
NOTE: the vehicle’s interior. WARNING!
• The Torx fasteners that attach the hard • Careless handling and storage of the re- Use both hands to remove the door frames.
top to the body should be torqued to 66 in movable door frame(s) may damage the The door frames will fold and could cause
lb +/- 22 in lb (7.5 N·m +/- 2.5 N·m) seals, causing water to leak into the vehi- injury if both hands are not used.
• It is not necessary to pinch connection cle’s interior.
2. Place one hand on the upper rear and one
when reinstalling washer hose. Push on • The door frame(s) must be positioned prop-
hand on the front of the door frame.
until click is heard. erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s 3. Pull the frame toward you with your rearward
interior. hand to remove the frame from the vehicle.

102

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. After the door frame pin has been set into
WARNING! the body side hole, carefully set the front of the
Never store the door frames in your vehicle. In door frame into the rubber seal at the top of the
an event of an accident, a loose door frame windshield.
many cause personal injury. If removed, al-
4. Starting with the front of the door frame, clip
ways store the door frames outside of the
it over the metal side bar and then clip the rear,
vehicle. making sure that the material for the side bar
covers is not pinched by the door frame.
Door Frame Installation — Two-Door
Models
4. Screw the knobs back into the door frame 1. Unfold door frame and unscrew thumb-
and fold for storage. Store in a secure location. screws.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of
the body side, behind the door opening.

103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Starting with the front knob, screw in and
tighten both knobs. Repeat on the other side.

3. Position the top of the door frame against 4. Loosely install the rear knob (long knob) to
the metal sport bar and press onto the side bar hold the door rail in position.
Door Frame Installation — making sure not to pinch the material of the 5. Carefully set the front of the front door frame
sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly
Four-Door Models in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield.
positioned on the seal above the front of the
1. Install the rear door frame first. rear door.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of
the body side, just behind the rear door open-
ing.

104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. Clip the front of the door rail over the side 9. Tighten the front knob, then the rear most
bar making sure that the material for the side knob, and then the middle knob. Repeat this CAUTION!
bar cover is not pinched by the door frame. procedure for the other side. The soft top is not designed to carry any
additional loads such as roof racks, spare
7. Position the rear of the front door frame to lay tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies,
on top of the front of the rear door frame. Ensure
and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed
the seals are installed correctly to avoid water
leaks. as a structural member of the vehicle and,
thus, cannot properly carry any additional
loads other than environmental (rain, snow,
etc.).

If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or

the top has been folded down for a period of
time, the top will appear to have shrunk when
SOFT TOP — TWO DOOR MODELS you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is
Please visit the owners section of Jeep.com caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl
for instructional videos. coating on the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily
8. Loosely install both knobs beginning with on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to
the front knob (long knob). Then, install the its original size and the top can then be in-
middle knob (short knob) through the front and stalled. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or
rear door frames and screw into the top of the below, do not attempt to put the top down or
B-pillar. roll the rear or side curtains.

105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CAUTION! WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not run a fabric top through an auto- • Do not drive the vehicle with the rear win- • Careless handling and storage of the soft
matic car wash. Window scratches and dow curtain up unless the side curtains are top may damage the seals, causing water
wax build up may result. also removed. Dangerous exhaust gases to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature could enter the vehicle causing harm to the • The soft top must be positioned properly to
is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top driver and passengers. ensure sealing. Improper installation can
may result. • The fabric upper doors and fabric top are cause water to leak into the vehicle’s inte-
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has designed only for protection against the rior.
been either fully attached to the windshield elements. Do not rely on them to contain
frame, or fully lowered. occupants within the vehicle or to protect Quick Steps to Lowering the Soft
• Do not lower the top with the windows against injury during an accident. Remem- Top
installed. Window and top damage may ber, always wear seat belts. Refer to “Lowering the Soft Top” in this section
occur. for further information.
• Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top 1. Remove the side and back windows.
CAUTION!
Models” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
further information. It contains important
interior water damage, stains or mildew on the
information on cleaning and caring for your
top material:
vehicle’s fabric top. • It is recommended that the top be free of
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or
opening a door or lowering a window while
retainers securing the soft top. Do not force
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
or pry the soft top framework when opening
the vehicle’s interior.
or closing. Damage to the top may result.
(Continued)

106

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Release header latches from the windshield NOTE:
frame. Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides
of the vehicle.

3. Release the Sunrider姞 latch (both sides).

Quick Steps to Raising the Soft Top
Refer to “Raising the Soft Top” in this section for
further information.
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top,
engaging the Sunrider姞 latches (another per-
son may be needed to help with this operation).

4. Open the swing gate and lower the top.

107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Engage header latches. 3. Install rear corner panels. 4. Install side and back windows.

108

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Lowering The Soft Top

1 — Header Bow 6 — Quarter Window

2 — 2–Bow 7 — Check Strap
3 — 3–Bow 8 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
4 — Sail Panel 9 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window
5 — Body Side Retainer

109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 — Zipper Start
2 — Zipper Finish
3 — Swing Gate Bar
4 — Swing Gate Brackets
5 — Sail Panels

110

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: • Unzip the rear window starting at the right
Clean side and rear windows before removal lower corner of the window. Pull the zip-
to assist in preventing scratching during per up, across the top and down to the left
removal of the soft top. If zippers are difficult lower corner. Zipper pulls will stay on
to operate due to road dust, etc., clean them the rear window. Pull down on the rear
with a mild soap solution and a small brush. window to disengage it from the zipper on
Cleaning products are available through the top cover.
your authorized dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half doors, remove each
half-door window by opening the door and
lifting the half-door window out. 4. Open the swing gate.
NOTE: 5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the
Stow the half-door windows carefully out- first 3 in (7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the
side of the vehicle, never inside, to avoid channel. Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it
scratches. straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Release the header latches and leave the
hooks in the loops on the windshield.

111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. Remove the rear window retainer from the
swing gate bracket on both the left and right
sides.

10. Once unzipped, remove the side window NOTE:

retainers from the door channel and body side When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
channel. Repeat this step on the opposite side. helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch- 11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers 12. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail
ing. from the body side channel at the rear corners panels so that they rest on top of the soft top.
8. Undo the Velcro姞 that runs along the top and of the vehicle.
rear edge of the side window.
9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, com-
pletely unzip the window.

112

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 15. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid
rearward over the Sunrider姞 link (Sunrider姞
Models only).

13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be 14. Completely release the latches from the
removed unless the hard top is being installed. loops on the windshield frame. If your vehicle
To remove the swing gate brackets, pull the is not equipped with the Sunrider姞 package,
front of the bracket forward while rolling the proceed to Step 15.
entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to
disengage.

113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 16. Unlatch the side bows from both door rails 19. Close the front header latches.
(Sunrider姞 Models only). 20. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer
to “Door Frame” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Raising the Soft Top
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Install door frames, if removed. Refer to
“Door Frame” in this section for further informa-
tion.
18. Tuck the fabric and the check straps be- 3. Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over
tween the bows and as far inward as possible. Sunrider姞 link (Sunrider姞 Models only).
17. Before lowering the top, open the swing This will keep any portion of the top from
gate to prevent possible damage to the rear flapping outside of the vehicle.
center high-mounted brake light. Move to the
front of the vehicle. Grasp the side bow behind
the header and lift the top, folding it toward the
rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Help from another person will ease this
operation.

114

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the 7. If the swing gate brackets were removed,
top by the side bow and the 2–bow (middle install them by hooking the rear edge of the
bow) up and over the sports bar until the bracket on the interior side of the body chan-
header rests on the top of the windshield frame. nel. Then, rotate it rearward and over the chan-
nel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail.
To be properly located, the bracket must only
be clipped to the shortened rail edge.

6. Open the header latches and engage the

hook on each side onto the windshield loops
(do not close the latches).

5. Make sure the Sunrider姞 bracket on the side

bows latches to the door rails (Sunrider姞 Mod-
els only).

115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently 11. Insert the front retainer of the window into
pull the sail panels over the rear roof bow. the door channel, making sure the retainer is
fully seated and properly positioned on the
door frame. Failure to do so can result in wind
and water leaks or damage to the window.

10. To install the side windows, affix the win-

dow temporarily by attaching to the Velcro姞 in
9. Partially install the sail panel retainers into the rear corner. Start the zipper but close only
the body side channel, leaving the last 3 in about 1 in (2.5 cm).
(7.6 cm) toward the rear window loose (on both
sides). Pulling down on the rear roof bow
(3–bow) will aid to reach the channel with the
retainers.

116

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 13. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the
swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom
inside of the rear window. The spongy part of
the seal should be down and pointed outward
to seal with the swing gate when closed.

1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion

12. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of

the window into the bottom side channel, be-
ginning at the front and working to the rear of
the vehicle. Finish by closing the zipper com-
pletely and attaching the Velcro姞 along the top
and rear of the window. Repeat this step for the
opposite side.

117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 14. Install the rear window by starting both 15. Run the zipper fully around to the right side
zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear of the window.
window opening. Ensure that the zippers are 16. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it
properly started and aligned before zipping to into the swing gate brackets.
prevent damage.

18. Apply downward pressure on the top cor-

ner of the rear soft top bow (3–bow), then
complete attaching the sail panel retainers into
the body side channel.
17. Insert the rear window retainer into the 19. Close the header latches and return the
swing gate bracket on both the left and right sun visors to their secured position.
sides.

118

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or
the top has been folded down for a period of CAUTION! (Continued)
time, the top will appear to have shrunk when • Do not move your vehicle until the top has
you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is been either fully attached to the windshield
caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl frame, or fully lowered.
coating on the fabric top. • Do not lower the top with the windows
installed. Window and top damage may
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily
on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to occur.
its original size and the top can then be • Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top
snapped into place. If the temperature is 41°F Models” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
(5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top further information. It contains important
SOFT TOP (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) down or roll the rear or side curtains. information on cleaning and caring for your
Please visit the owner’s section of Jeep.com vehicle’s fabric top.
for instructional videos. • Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to
CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an auto- pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or
CAUTION! matic car wash. Window scratches and retainers securing the soft top. Do not force
The soft top is not designed to carry any or pry the soft top framework when opening
wax buildup may result.
additional loads such as roof racks, spare • Do not lower the top when the temperature or closing. Damage to the top may result.
tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top
and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed may result.
as a structural member of the vehicle, and WARNING!
• Do not lower the top when the windows are • Do not drive the vehicle with the rear win-
thus cannot properly carry any additional dirty. Grit may scratch the window. dow curtain up unless the side curtains are
loads other than environmental (rain, snow,
(Continued) also open. Dangerous exhaust gases
etc.).
which can kill could enter the vehicle.
(Continued)
119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)
• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are • The soft top must be positioned properly to
designed only for protection against the ensure sealing. Improper installation can
elements. Do not rely on them to contain cause water to leak into the vehicle’s inte-
occupants within the vehicle or to protect rior.
against injury during an accident. Remem-
ber, always wear seat belts. NOTE:
Do not remove any of the three attachment
knobs unless you are planning on installing
CAUTION!
the hard top.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause 2. Release header latches from the windshield
interior water damage, stains or mildew on the frame.
top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the soft
top may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
Quick Steps for Lowering the Soft
Top
3. Fold header rearward, pulling the fabric to
1. Remove the side and back windows. the rear.

120

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Quick Steps for Raising the Soft Top
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top,
engaging the Sunrider姞 latches (another per-
son may be needed to help with this operation).

5. Open the swing gate and lower the top.

4. Release Sunrider姞 latch (both sides).

NOTE:
Ensure the fabric does not overhang the
sides of the vehicle.
121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Install rear corner panels. 5. Install the side and back windows.

4. Engage the header latches.

3. Rotate the header forward.

122

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Folding Down The Soft Top

1 — Header Bow 6 — Body Side Retainer

2 — 2–Bow 7 — Quarter Window
3 — 3–Bow 8 — Check Strap
4 — 4–Bow 9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
5 — Sail Panel 10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window

123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 — Zipper Start
2 — Zipper Finish
3 — Swing Gate Bar
4 — Swing Gate Brackets
5 — Sail Panels

124

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: 2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side. 4. Open the swing gate.
Clean side and rear windows before removal 3. Release the header latches and hooks from 5. Before unzipping the rear window, release
to assist in preventing scratching during the loops on the windshield frame. the first 3 in (7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the
removal of the soft top. If zippers are difficult channel. Remove the swing gate bar by pulling
to operate due to road dust, etc., clean them it straight rearward out of the swing gate brack-
with a mild soap solution and a small brush. ets.
Cleaning products are available through
your authorized dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half-doors, remove each
half-door window by opening the door and
lifting the half-door window out.
NOTE:
Stow half-door windows carefully outside of
the vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.

125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Unzip the rear window starting at the right
lower corner of the window. Pull the zip-
per up, across the top and down to the left
lower corner. Zipper pulls will stay on
the rear window. Pull down on the rear
window to disengage it from the zipper on
the top cover.

7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch- 10. Once unzipped, remove the side window
ing. retainers from the door channel and body side
8. Undo the Velcro姞 that runs along the top and channel. Repeat this step on the opposite side.
rear edge of the side window. 11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers
from the body side channel at the rear corners
9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, com-
of the vehicle.
pletely unzip the window.
6. Remove the rear window retainer from the
swing gate bracket on both the left and right
sides.

126

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: 13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be 14. Grasp the front side bow behind the
When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is removed unless the hard top is being installed. header, and lift the top.
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow. To remove the swing gate brackets, pull the
front of the bracket forward while rolling the
12. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to
of the soft top. disengage.

127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 15. Fold back the front section of the top, 18. Before lowering the top, open the swing
pulling the fabric rearward. Gently rest the gate to prevent possible damage to the rear
header on top of the rear portion of the deck. center high-mounted brake light. Grasp the
folded side bows and slide the top along the
door frame track to the rear door frame.

17. Release the side bows by pressing down

on the latch above the front of the rear door.
Push the top rearward to disengage. Repeat
16. Fold the top so that the material forms a this step on the other side.
⬙W⬙ as shown. Enter the vehicle and move the
material into two folds. 19. Gently slide the side bows off the door
frame track and lower the top down into the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Help from another person will ease this
operation.

128

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Undo the straps used to secure the top in
the down position and store in secure location.
3. Open the swing gate.
4. Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the
top of the rear door frames.
NOTE:
Help from another person will ease this
operation.

20. Tuck the fabric and the check straps be- 22. Close the front header latches.
tween the bows as far inside as possible. This 23. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer
will keep any portion of the top from flapping to “Door Frame” in this section for further infor-
outside of the vehicle. mation.
21. Once the top is fully down, use the Velcro姞
straps provided to secure the top to the vehicle
Putting Up The Soft Top
by wrapping the strap around the side bows NOTE:
and through the slot on the body. Be extremely careful when putting up the
soft top to prevent the doors from getting
scratched. It may be helpful to open the rear
doors.
1. Install the door frames, if removed. Refer to
“Door Frame” in this section for further informa-
tion.

129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into 9. Open the header latches and engage the
the door frame tracks and slide the top forward. hook on each side onto the windshield loops
(do not close the latches).

7. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.

8. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the
6. Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider姞 top by the side bow until it rests on the wind-
locking mechanisms that are located above the shield frame. 10. If the swing gate brackets were removed,
front of the rear doors. install them by hooking the rear edge of the
bracket on the interior side of the body chan-
nel. Then, rotate it rearward and over the chan-
nel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail.
To be properly located, the bracket must only
be clipped to the shortened rail edge.

130

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Partially install the sail panel retainers into the
body side channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm)
toward the rear window loose (on both sides).
Pulling down on the rear roof bow (4–bow) will
aid in reaching the channel with the retainers.

11. Ensure that the straps are positioned cor- 13. Insert the front retainer of the window into
rectly before pulling the sail panels over the the door channel, making sure the retainer is
rear roof bow (4–bow). fully seated and properly positioned on the
door frame. Failure to do so can result in wind
and water leaks or damage to the window.
12. To install the side windows, affix the win-
dow temporarily by attaching it to the Velcro姞 in
the upper rear corner. Start the zipper but close
only about 1 in (2.5 cm).

131

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 the seal should be down and pointed outward
to seal with the swing gate when closed.

1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion

14. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of 16. Install the rear window by starting both
the window into the bottom side channel, be- zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear
ginning at the front and working to the rear of window opening. Ensure that the zippers are
the vehicle. Finish by closing the zipper com- properly started and aligned before zipping to
pletely and attaching the Velcro姞 along the top prevent damage.
and rear of the window. Repeat this step for the
opposite side.

15. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the

swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom
inside of the rear window. The spongy part of

132

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 19. Insert the rear window retainer into the
swing gate bracket on both the left and right
sides.

17. Run the first zipper fully around to the right SUNRIDER姞 (TWO-DOOR MODELS)
side of the window. — IF EQUIPPED
18. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it
into the swing gate brackets. 20. Complete the installation of the sail panel CAUTION!
by inserting the rest of the retainer into the body Operating the top, opening a door or lowering
channel. a window while the top is wet may allow water
21. Close the header latches and return the to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
sun visors to their secured position.
NOTE:
If you are going to be driving faster than
40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider姞 feature
open, it is recommended that you remove
the rear window of the vehicle.

133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Opening the Sunrider姞
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops
on the windshield frame.

4. Grasp the header and lift the top back. 5. Locate the straps to secure the side bows.
Make sure the material is folded back as Wrap the straps around the bows as shown.
shown. Repeat on the other side.
NOTE:
The Sunrider姞 latch on the door rail should
3. Slide the plastic sleeve forward. not be activated for Sunrider姞 use. If acti-
vated, the soft top must be reinstalled start-
ing from the sail panels.

6. Reposition the sun visors.

134

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Closing the Sunrider姞 Opening the Sunrider姞
1. Remove the straps from the side bows. 1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side. 2. Release the header latches from the loops
3. Grasp the front header and pull it to the front on the windshield frame.
of the vehicle.
4. Hook the header latches to the loops on the
windshield frame, close latches, and return the
sun visors to their original positions.
5. Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the
Sunrider姞 link. 4. Fold back the front section of the top and
gently rest the header on top of the rear portion
SUNRIDER姞 (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) of the deck.
— IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION! 3. Grasp the front side bow behind the header,

Operating the top, opening a door or lowering and lift the top.
a window while the top is wet may allow water
to drip into the vehicle’s interior.

NOTE:
If you are going to be driving faster than
40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider姞 feature
open, it is recommended that you remove
the rear window of the vehicle.
135

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5. Fold the top so that the material forms a ⬙W⬙ Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
as shown. Enter the vehicle and move the windshield down and the side bars removed as
material into two folds. you lose the protection these structural ele-
ments can provide.
If required for certain off-road uses, the side
bars can be removed and the windshield
folded down. However, the protection afforded
by these features is then lost. If you remove the
side bars and fold down the windshield, drive
slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that
the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph
Closing the Sunrider姞 (16 km/h), with low range operation preferred if
Perform the above steps in the opposite order. you are driving off-road with the windshield
NOTE: folded down.
6. Secure the top by using the two provided
Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars
straps. Each strap will wrap around the side
the material to sag and may block the rear- as soon as the task that required their removal
bow and Velcro姞 to itself; use one strap on
view mirror. is completed and before you return to on-road
each side of the vehicle.
driving. Both you and your passenger should
FOLDING WINDSHIELD wear seat belts at all times, on-road and off-
The fold-down windshield and removable side road, regardless of whether the windshield is
bars on your vehicle are structural elements raised or folded down.
that can provide some protection in some ac-
cidents. The windshield also provides some Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the
protection against weather, road debris and doors. If you choose to remove the doors, see
intrusion of small branches and other objects. your authorized dealer for a replacement cowl-

136

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 mounted outside mirror. Federal law requires
outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use. WARNING! (Continued)
• If you remove the doors, store them outside
the vehicle. In the event of an accident, a
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect loose door may cause personal injury.
against personal injury:
• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the Lowering the Windshield and
windshield down. Removing Side Bars
• Do not drive your vehicle unless the wind- 1. Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top
shield is securely fastened, either up or following the instructions in this manual.
down. NOTE: 3. Remove the sun visor.
• Eye protection, such as goggles, should be
To assist in properly reinstalling side bars, 4. Remove the A-pillar cap.
worn at all times when the windshield is mark the original locations prior to remov-
down. ing. 5. Disconnect microphone (if equipped with
• Be sure that you carefully follow the instruc- uconnect™ phone).
tions for raising the windshield. Make sure 2. Remove the two top hex bolts (13 mm), and
the one side hex bolt (13 mm) visible through 6. Open the sport bar Velcro covering.
that the folding windshield, windshield wip-
the trim (Do not remove plastic corner trim, sun 7. Remove the one hex bolt (13 mm) visible
ers, side bars, and all associated hardware visor bolts, or sport bar covering). through the plastic trim on the bottom side of
and fasteners are correctly and tightly as-
the side bar, one hex bolt (13 mm) on the side
sembled before driving your vehicle. Fail- of the side bar, and one hex bolt (13 mm) on top
ure to follow these instructions may prevent of the side bar.
your vehicle from providing you and your
passengers protection in some accidents.
(Continued)

137

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: 9. To safely store the side bars in your vehicle, 11. Remove the lower windshield plates by
Pull side bar out horizontally when remov- use four cinch straps (available from your au- removing the six black round-headed Torx姞
ing. thorized dealer). Attach the straps through the head screws (using a #40 Torx姞 head driver) on
slots located on the floor behind the folded rear each side of the base of the windshield.
seat at the front of the storage bin cover.

WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you carry the
side bars loose in your vehicle. Remove the
side bars from the vehicle or securely store
them as described or they may cause per-
sonal injury if an accident occurs. See your
authorized dealer for the cinch straps.
10. Remove the windshield wiper arms by first
CAUTION! pulling the wiper away from the windshield and 12. Lower the windshield gently until it con-
Do not remove the head impact foam from the out to the “lock” position. Unsnap the wiper arm tacts the rubber hood bumpers.
side bars, as damage to the foam may result. nut caps, and remove the retaining nuts. Lift the 13. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch
wiper arms off and store them in the center strap through the footman hoop on the center of
NOTE: console or securely behind the rear seat. the hood and on the center of the windshield
Store all of the mounting bolts in their origi- frame. Tighten the strap to secure the wind-
nal threaded holes and tighten for safekeep- NOTE:
shield in place.
ing. It may be necessary to use a battery terminal
puller tool in order to separate the wiper
8. Remove the side bar assembly, and reat-
arms from the shaft after the nuts have been
tach the sport bar Velcro姞 covering.
removed.

138

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Raising the Windshield and • Reattach the sport bar Velcro姞 covering. 4. Tighten all side bar attachment bolts.
Replacing Side Bars 3. Attach the front of the side bar to the wind- 5. Install the lower windshield plates with the
1. Raise the windshield. shield frame. six black round-headed Torx姞 head screws
• Install the top two hex bolts (13 mm) first, (using a #40 Torx姞 head driver) on each side of
2. Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the the base of the windshield.
sport bar. Refer to Step 4 of “Lowering Wind- then the lower side hex bolt (13 mm). The
shield And Removing Side Bars” earlier in this lower side bolt will not align until the top
section. two bolts are installed.

6. Reinstall the wiper arms.

139

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 REAR WINDOW FEATURES — Rotate the switch upward past the first NOTE:
HARD TOP ONLY detent to activate the rear washer. The To prevent excessive battery drain, use the
washer pump and the wiper will con- rear window defroster only when the engine
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If tinue to operate as long as the switch is is operating.
Equipped held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle two to
A rotary switch on the center portion of the three times before returning to the set position.
control lever (located on the right side of the CAUTION!
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is Failure to follow these cautions can cause
steering column) controls the operation of the
turned to the LOCK position, the wiper will damage to the heating elements:
rear wiper/washer function.
automatically return to the “Park” position. • Use care when washing the inside of the
When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will rear window. Do not use abrasive window
resume function at whichever position the cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
switch is set at.
dow. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing
Rear Window Defroster — If solution, wiping parallel to the heating ele-
Equipped ments. Labels can be peeled off after soak-
The rear window defroster button is ing with warm water.
located on the bottom right-side of the • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
blower control knob. Press this button abrasive window cleaners on the interior
to turn on the rear window defroster. An indica- surface of the window.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control tor in the button will illuminate when the rear • Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window defroster is on. The rear window de- window.
froster automatically turns off after approxi-
Rotate the switch upward to the first
mately 10 minutes. For an additional five min-
detent position for rear wiper operation.
utes of operation, press the button a second
time.

140

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT
PANEL
• INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
• COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
• Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
• Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
• Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
• ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays . . 159
• Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
• Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
• Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) . . 162
141

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • SOUND SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
• STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
• Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
• CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
• CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
• RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . . . . . . . . . 165
• CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
• Manual Heating and Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
• Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped . . . 168
• Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

142

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlet 7 — Climate Controls

2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Power Outlet
3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank
4 — Assist Handle 10 — Power Mirror Switch — If Equipped
5 — Glove Compartment 11 — Horn
6 — Power Window Switches

143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE

144

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – DIESEL

145

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump 7. Seat Belt Reminder Light
DESCRIPTIONS Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer- When the ignition switch is first turned
gencies”. to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for
1. Fuel Gauge four to eight seconds as a bulb check.
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel 3. Front Fog Light Indicator
During the bulb check, if the driver’s
tank. This indicator will illuminate when the
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After
front fog lights are on.
NOTE: the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
the fuel and temperature gauges may not 4. Low Fuel Warning Light Warning Light will flash or remain on continu-
show accurate readings. When the engine is When the fuel level reaches approxi- ously. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things
not running, turn the ignition switch to ON/ mately 2 U.S. Gallons (7.6L) this light will To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for fur-
RUN to obtain accurate readings. come on and remain on until fuel is ther information.
added. The “Low Fuel Warning Light”
2. Charging System Light 8. Turn Signal Indicators
may turn on and off again, especially during
This light shows the status of the elec- The left or right arrow will flash with the
and after hard braking, accelerations, or turns.
trical charging system. The light corresponding exterior turn signal lights
This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the
should come on when the ignition when the turn signal lever is operated. A
tank.
switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or 5. Speedometer than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
comes on while driving, turn off some of the Indicates vehicle speed.
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
vehicle’s non-essential electrical devices or 6. Front Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped This light shows low engine oil pres-
increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charg- Indicates when the front axle lock sure. The light should turn on momen-
ing system light remains on, it means that the has been activated. tarily when the engine is started, if the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the bulb does not come on, have the system
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDI- checked by an authorized dealer. If the light
ATELY. See an authorized dealer. turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut

146

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will If the light remains on when the parking brake fluid level conditions. The vehicle should
sound when this light turns on. has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at have service performed, and the brake fluid
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it level checked.
corrected. This light does not indicate how indicates a possible brake hydraulic system If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level necessary.
must be checked under the hood. Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Pro-
10. High Beam Indicator Light gram (ESP) system. In this case, the light will WARNING!
This light shows that the high beam remain on until the condition has been cor- Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
headlights are on. Push the multifunc- rected. If the problem is related to the brake dangerous. Part of the brake system may
tion control lever away from you to booster, the ABS pump will run when applying have failed. It will take longer to stop the
switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
lever towards you to switch the headlights back felt during each stop. vehicle checked immediately.
to low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and
The dual brake system provides a reserve
the headlights or park lights are left on, the high Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
beam indicator light will remain illuminated and System (ABS), are also equipped with Elec-
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
a chime will sound. tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
11. Brake Warning Light Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
This light monitors various brake func- brake fluid level in the master cylinder has Immediate repair to the ABS system is re-
tions, including brake fluid level and dropped below a specified level. quired.
parking brake application. If the brake
The light will remain on until the cause is
light turns on, it may indicate that the parking Operation of the brake warning light can be
corrected.
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, checked by turning the ignition switch from the
or that there is a problem with the anti-lock NOTE: OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
brake system reservoir. The light may flash momentarily during should illuminate for approximately two sec-
sharp cornering maneuvers which change onds. The light should then turn off unless the

147

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 parking brake is applied or a brake fault is 13. Airbag Warning Light engine is off while in Stop/Start mode, ta-
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have This light will turn on for four to chometer needle will be in green banded
the light inspected by an authorized dealer. eight seconds as a bulb check zone of tachometer and the EVIC message
The light also will turn on when the parking when the ignition switch is first “Stop/Start Auto Stop Active” will display for
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is five seconds. For further information on the
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position. either not on during starting, stays Start/Stop system, refer to “Start/Stop Sys-
on, or turns on while driving, then tem” in “Starting And Operating”.
NOTE: have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant CAUTION!
This light shows only that the parking brake
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Do not operate the engine with the tachom-
is applied. It does not show the degree of
brake application. Your Vehicle” for further information. eter pointer in the red area. Engine damage
12. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light 14. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If will occur.
Equipped
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti- 16. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates when the rear
Lock Brake System (ABS) light illumi- This light warns of an overheated en-
axle lock has been activated.
nates to indicate function check at gine condition. If the engine is critically
vehicle start-up. If the light remains on after hot, a warning chime will sound 10
start-up or comes on and stays on at road times. After the chime turns off, the
speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has de- engine will still be critically hot until the light
tected a malfunction or has become inopera- 15. Tachometer goes out.
tive. The system reverts to standard non-anti- Indicates the engine speed in Revolutions Per
lock brakes. Minute (RPM). 17. Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS NOTE: rear fog lights are on.
Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer If equipped with a diesel engine and a
immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” manual transmission the vehicle will be
in “Starting And Operating”. equipped with a Start/Stop mode. When the
148

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 18. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped 20. Cruise Indicator Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for CAUTION! This light shows when the elec-
approximately 15 seconds, when Driving with a hot engine cooling system could tronic speed control system is
the vehicle security alarm is arm- damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge turned on.
ing, and then will flash slowly until reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
21. 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
the vehicle is disarmed. the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
This light alerts the driver that the
19. Temperature Gauge until the pointer drops back into the normal vehicle is in the four-wheel drive
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and mode, and the front and rear drive-
temperature. Any reading within the normal you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine shafts are mechanically locked to-
range indicates that the engine cooling system off immediately, and call an authorized deal- gether forcing the front and rear
is operating satisfactorily. ership for service. wheels to rotate at the same
speed.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up WARNING! 22. Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. Saver Indicator) Button
should not be allowed to exceed the upper You or others could be badly burned by steam Press this button to change the display from
limits of the normal operating range. or boiling coolant. You may want to call an odometer to either of the two trip odometer
settings or the “ECO” display. Trip A or Trip B
authorized dealership for service if your ve-
will appear when in the trip odometer mode.
hicle overheats. If you decide to look under Press and hold the button for two seconds to
the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Ve- reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers.
hicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
23. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained
within the instrument cluster. It displays the
gear position of the automatic transmission.

149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 24. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
Each tire, including the spare (if proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s the TPMS to continue to function properly.
provided), should be checked responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
monthly, when cold and inflated to even if under-inflation has not reached the level CAUTION!
the inflation pressure recom- to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire The TPMS has been optimized for the original
mended by the vehicle manufac- pressure telltale. equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
turer on the vehicle placard or tire Your vehicle has also been equipped with a and warning have been established for the tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
of a different size than the size indicated on the
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS system operation or sensor damage may re-
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, malfunction indicator is combined with the low sult when using replacement equipment that
you should determine the proper tire inflation tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
pressure for those tires.) is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has mately one minute and then remain continu- Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam-
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring ously illuminated. This sequence will continue age. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is the malfunction exists. When the malfunction a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when indicator is illuminated, the system may not be result.
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
should stop and check your tires as soon as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a 25. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- variety of reasons, including the installation of Area
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the The odometer shows the total distance the
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction shows individual trip mileage. Refer to “Odom-
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the telltale after replacing one or more tires or eter / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indica-
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the tor) Button” for additional information.

150

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicle Odometer Messages odometer to either of the two trip odometer
When the appropriate conditions exist, the fol- settings or the “ECO” display. CAUTION!
lowing odometer messages will display: Continuous driving with the Transmission
LoW tirE Temperature “HOTOIL” Warning message il-
When the appropriate condition exists, the luminated will eventually cause severe trans-
ECO . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator Off odometer display will toggle between LoW and
ECO-ON . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator On mission damage or transmission failure.
tirE for three cycles.
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar “HOTOIL” Transmission Temperature
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar Warning Message WARNING!
LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure The “HOTOIL” cluster message will appear in If the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL”
HOTOIL . . . . Transmission Oil Temperature the odometer accompanied with a chime to Warning message is illuminated and you con-
Above Normal Limits indicate that there is excessive transmission tinue operating the vehicle, in some circum-
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault fluid temperature that might occur with severe stances you could cause the fluid to boil over,
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault usage such as trailer towing. It may also occur come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
when operating the vehicle in a high torque components and cause a fire.
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . Oil Change Required
converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel drive
ESPOFF . . . . . . . . . . . ESP Deactivated operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road opera- gASCAP
ECO / ECO-ON (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If tion). If this “HOTOIL” message turns on, stop If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
Equipped the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster, that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the installed, or damaged, a “gASCAP” message
are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be message turns off. will display in the odometer display area.
used to modify driving habits in order to in- Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
crease fuel economy. The ECO display will the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the
toggle between ECO and ECO-ON depending message. If the problem continues, the mes-
on driving habits and vehicle usage. Press the sage will appear the next time the vehicle is
Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver started.
Indicator) button to change the display from
151

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 noFUSE the oil change indicator system (after perform- Certain conditions such as a loose or missing
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines ing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc. may illuminate
that the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improp- following procedure: the light after engine start. The vehicle should
erly installed, or damaged, a “noFUSE” mes- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN be serviced if the light stays on through several
sage will display in the odometer display area. typical driving styles. In most situations, the
position (Do not start the engine).
For further information on fuses and fuse loca- vehicle will drive normally and will not require
tions refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Ve- 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal towing.
hicle”. slowly three times within 10 seconds.
CHAngE OIL Message 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil position. Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
change indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” damage to the engine control system. It also
message will flash in the instrument cluster NOTE: could affect fuel economy and drivability. If the
odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a If the indicator message illuminates when MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
single chime has sounded to indicate the next you start the vehicle, the oil change indica- damage and power loss will soon occur. Im-
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil tor system did not reset. If necessary repeat
mediate service is required.
change indicator system is duty-cycle based, this procedure.
which means the engine oil change interval 26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may fluctuate dependent upon your personal The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
driving style. is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
Unless reset, this message will continue to System called OBD II that monitors
display each time you turn the ignition switch to engine and automatic transmission
the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message control systems. The light will illumi-
temporarily, press and release the Trip Odom- nate when the ignition is in the ON position
eter button on the instrument cluster. To reset before engine start. If the bulb does not come
on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN,
have the condition checked promptly.
152

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 cator Light is on solid, the ESP system has 31. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
WARNING! been turned off by the driver or a temporary This light informs you of a problem
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer- condition exists that will not allow full ESP with the Electronic Throttle Control
enced above, can reach higher temperatures function. (ETC) system. If a problem is de-
than in normal operating conditions. This can tected while the engine is running,
28. O/D (Overdrive) Off Indicator Light
cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over the light will either stay on or flash
This light will illuminate when the O/D
flammable substances such as dry plants or OFF button has been selected and over- depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle
wood or cardboard, etc. This could result in the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
drive has been turned off. The O/D OFF
death or serious injury to the driver, occupants completely stopped and the shift lever is
button is located on the center console.
or others. placed in the PARK position. The light should
29. Sway Bar Indicator Light — If turn off. If the light remains on with the engine
27. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Equipped running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
Indicator Light / Traction Control System This light will illuminate when the however, see an authorized dealer for service
(TCS) Indicator Light front sway bar is disconnected. as soon as possible.
If the Electronic Stability Program If the light continues to flash when the engine is
(ESP) / Traction Control System running, immediate service is required and you
(TCS) Indicator Light begins to may experience reduced performance, an el-
flash during acceleration, ease up 30. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF evated / rough idle, or engine stall and your
on the accelerator and apply as Indicator Light — If Equipped vehicle may require towing. The light will come
little throttle as possible. This indi- This light indicates the Electronic on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN
cator light starts to flash as soon as the tires Stability Control (ESC) is off. and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the
lose traction and the Electronic Stability Pro- light does not come on during starting, have
gram (ESP) becomes active. The ESP/TCS the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions. If the ESP/TCS Indi-

153

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 32. Electronic Vehicle Information Center hicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Start- and may need to be driven several minutes
(EVIC) Display / Compass Mini-Trip ing And Operating”. before the updated temperature is dis-
Computer Display — If Equipped played. Engine temperature can also affect
When the appropriate conditions exist, this COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER the displayed temperature, therefore tem-
display shows the Electronic Vehicle Informa- The Compass/Trip Computer is located in the perature readings are not updated when the
tion Center (EVIC) messages. For further infor- instrument cluster. It features a driver- vehicle is not moving.
mation, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information interactive display (displays information such Press and release the left button (on the instru-
Center”. as outside temperature, compass direction, ment cluster) to access the computer displays.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this and trip information).
Press and hold the left button (on the instru-
display shows the Mini-Trip Computer mes- ment cluster) for two to three seconds to switch
sages. Refer to “Mini-Trip Computer” for further from English to Metric displays.
information.
Reset / Change Display
33. Water In Fuel Indicator Light — Diesel Press and hold the left button (on the instru-
Only ment cluster) while function is being displayed
This light indicates water has col- to reset or change the display.
lected in the fuel filter and should
be drained immediately. See an The following trip displays can be reset or
authorized dealer for service. changed:
• AVG ECO (changes to present fuel
34. Wait To Start Light — Diesel Only Compass/Trip Computer economy)
This light will illuminate when the • ET (will reset display)
ignition switch is first turned to the
Control Buttons
ON position. Wait until the light NOTE:
turns off before starting the ve- The system will display the last known out-
side temperature when starting the vehicle
154

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trip Conditions Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B WARNING!
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) Even if the display still reads a few degrees
since the last reset.
This display shows the average fuel economy above 32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be
since the last reset. ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped icy, particularly in woods or on bridges. Drive
Estimated Range (DTE) The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you
carefully under such conditions to prevent an
This display shows the estimated distance that are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be
used to modify driving habits in order to in- accident and possible personal injury or prop-
can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the
crease fuel economy. The ECO display will erty damage.
tank. This estimated distance is based on the
most recent trip information: (Average Fuel toggle between ECO and ECO-ON depending
Economy) x (Fuel Remaining). on driving habits and vehicle usage. Automatic Compass Calibration
The self-calibrating feature of the compass
This display cannot be reset. Compass/Temperature Display eliminates the need to calibrate the compass
Elapsed Time (ET) NOTE: for normal conditions. During a short initial
This display shows the accumulated ignition period, the compass may appear erratic and
If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler
ON time since the last reset. the CAL symbol will appear (blinking) on the
Uconnect™ gps (Navigation Radio), the NAV
Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO (Fuel Saver display. After the vehicle has completed at
system will provide the compass direction,
Indicator) — If Equipped least one complete circle under 5 mph (8 km/h)
and the variance and calibration menus will
This display shows the distance traveled since in an area free from large metal objects, cali-
be unavailable. The compass will perform
the last reset. Press and release the right button bration will be complete when the CAL indica-
accurately, based on GPS signals instead of
(on the instrument cluster) to switch from odom- tor turns off.
the Earth’s magnetic field.
eter, to Trip A or Trip B, or to ECO. Press and After initial calibration, the compass will con-
hold the right button while the odometer/trip This display provides the outside temperature
tinue to automatically update this calibration
odometer is displayed to reset. and one of eight compass readings to indicate
whenever the vehicle is in motion.
the direction the vehicle is facing.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
155

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: for approximately 10 seconds to enter the vari- driven. When properly set, the compass will
• A good calibration requires a level surface ance mode, and release the button when the VAR automatically account for this difference.
and an environment free from large metallic (Compass Variance) symbol appears.
Setting The Compass Variance
objects such as buildings, bridges, under- 2. The current variance value will also be dis- Refer to the variance map for the correct com-
ground cables, railroad tracks, etc. played. Once in the variance mode, it is nec- pass variance zone. To check the variance
• Magnetic and battery powered devices, essary to release the button, and then press zone, the ignition must be ON. Press and hold
(such as cell phones, iPod’s, radar detec- and hold it again (approximately 10 seconds) the left button (located on the instrument clus-
tors, PDA’s and laptops) should be kept until CAL is displayed (solid, not blinking). ter) for approximately 10 seconds to enter the
away from the top of the instrument variance mode and release the button when the
3. Manual compass calibration has been initi- VAR symbol appears. The current variance
panel. This is where the compass module ated. Drive the vehicle slowly in one or more value will also be displayed. To change the
is located and such devices may interfere circles under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free zone, press the left button once to increment
and cause false compass readings.
from large metal objects until the CAL indicator the zone. The default is Zone 8. After Zone 15,
Manual Compass Calibration turns off. the values will wrap around to Zone 1. When the
correct zone is displayed (per the Compass
NOTE: When the CAL symbol is no longer displayed, the Variance Zone Map) for the zone that the
Before attempting a manual compass calibra- compass is calibrated and should display correct vehicle is located in, wait for about ten sec-
tion, the engine must be running and the headings. Verify proper calibration by checking onds; then the trip computer will store the
transmission in the PARK position (if North (N), South (S), East (E), and West (W). If the variance value in memory and the compass will
equipped). compass does not appear accurate, repeat the resume normal operation.
calibration procedure in another area.
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate NOTE:
and the variance has been properly set, you Compass Variance (VAR) The U.S./Metric display will change from
may wish to manually recalibrate the compass. Compass Variance is the difference between English to Metric or Metric to English before
To manually calibrate the compass: Magnetic North and Geographic North. To en- the VAR symbol appears, however, it will
sure compass accuracy, the compass variance revert back to its original setting after pro-
1. First enter the variance mode. Press and hold should be properly set according to the vari-
the left button (located on the instrument cluster) gramming the compass functions.
ance map for the zone where the vehicle will be
156

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Compass Variance Map

157

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Outside Temperature This system conveniently allows the driver to
If the outside temperature is more than 131°F select a variety of useful information by press-
(55°C), the display will show 131°F (55°C). ing the switches mounted on the steering
When the outside temperature is less than wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
⫺40°F (⫺40°C), the display will show ⫺40°F • System Status
(⫺40°C).
• Vehicle information warning message dis-
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE plays
INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF • Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)
EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center • Stop/Start System Status (if equipped)
(EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
is located in the instrument cluster. Features) MENU Button
• Compass display Press and release the MENU but-
ton to scroll through the main
• Outside temperature display menus (Fuel Economy, Warnings,
• Trip computer functions Timer, Units, System, Personal Set-
tings) or to exit sub menus.
• Uconnect™ gps system screens (if
equipped) COMPASS Button
Press and release the COMPASS
• Audio mode display button to display one of eight com-
The system allows the driver to select informa- pass readings and the outside
tion by pressing the following buttons mounted temperature or to exit sub menus
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) on the steering wheel:

158

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SELECT Button • Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a • Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is
Press and release the SELECT single chime) in motion)
button for access to main menus, • RKE Battery Low (with a single chime) • Liftgate Ajar (with a single chime)
sub menus or to select a personal
setting in the setup menu. • Memory #1/#2 Profile Set • Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in
“Starting And Operating” for more details)
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
DOWN Button • Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not in • Service Park Assist System (with a single
Press and release the DOWN but- Park (with a single chime) — Automatic chime)
ton to scroll downward through the Transmission • Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
sub menus.
• Memory System Disabled – Vehicle in Motion • ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
(with a single chime) — Manual Transmission • Stop/Start Not Ready — Diesel Manual
Electronic Vehicle Information • Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buck- Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start Sys-
Center (EVIC) Displays led (with a single chime) tem” in “Starting And Operating” for more
details)
When the appropriate conditions exist, the • Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not
EVIC displays the following messages. in Park — Automatic Transmission • Stop/Start Ready — Diesel Manual Transmis-
sion Only (refer to “Stop/Start System” in
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning • Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle in
“Starting And Operating” for more details)
chime) Motion — Manual Transmission
• Stop/Start Auto Stop Active — Diesel Manual
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single • Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with
Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start Sys-
chime) a single chime if speed is above 1 mph
tem” in “Starting And Operating” for more
(1.6 km/h))
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single details)
chime) • Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with
a single chime if speed is above 1 mph
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a
(1.6 km/h))
single chime)
159

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Stop/Start Key Start Required — Diesel the ON position. To turn off the message tem- • Display Units of Measure in
Manual Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/ porarily, press and release the MENU button. To Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all
Start System” in “Starting And Operating” for reset the oil change indicator system (after the Trip Computer functions.
more details) performing the scheduled maintenance) per-
form the following procedure: The Trip Functions mode displays the following
• Service Stop/Start System — Diesel Manual information:
Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start Sys- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
tem” in “Starting And Operating” for more Do not start the engine. • Average Fuel Economy
details) Shows the average fuel economy since the last
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the
• Stop/Start System Page — Diesel Manual three times within 10 seconds. display will read “RESET” or show dashes for
Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start Sys- 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- two seconds. Then, the history information will
tem” in “Starting And Operating” for more tion. be erased, and the averaging will continue from
details) the last fuel average reading before the reset.
NOTE:
Oil Change Required • Distance To Empty (DTE)
If the indicator message illuminates when
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil Shows the estimated distance that can be
you start the vehicle, the oil change indica-
change indicator system. The “Oil Change Re- traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This
tor system did not reset. If necessary, repeat
quired” message will flash in the EVIC display estimated distance is determined by a
this procedure.
for approximately 10 seconds after a single weighted average of the instantaneous and
chime has sounded to indicate the next sched- Trip Functions average fuel economy, according to the current
uled oil change interval. The engine oil change Press and release the MENU button until one of fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the
indicator system is duty cycle based, which the following Trip Functions displays in the FUNCTION SELECT button.
means the engine oil change interval may EVIC:
fluctuate dependent upon your personal driv- NOTE:
• Average Fuel Economy
ing style. Significant changes in driving style or ve-
• Distance To Empty hicle loading will greatly affect the actual
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you turn the ignition switch to • Elapsed Time
160

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless resettable functions, press and release the message will appear whenever you are driving
of the DTE displayed value. FUNCTION SELECT button a second time in a fuel efficient manner.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles within three seconds of resetting the currently This feature allows you to monitor when you are
(48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE displayed function (reset ALL will display dur- driving in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be
ing this three-second window).
display will change to a text display of ⬙LOW used to modify driving habits in order to in-
FUEL.⬙ This display will continue until the ve- Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver crease fuel economy.
hicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant Mode) — If Equipped Automatic Compass Calibration
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the The compass readings indicate the direction This compass is self-calibrating, which elimi-
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will the vehicle is facing. Press and release the nates the need to set the compass manually.
display. COMPASS button to display one of eight com- When the vehicle is new, the compass may
• Elapsed Time pass readings and the outside temperature. appear erratic and the EVIC will display “CAL”
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the NOTE: until the compass is calibrated. You may also
last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC The system will display the last known out- calibrate the compass by completing one or
position. Elapsed time will increment when the side temperature when starting the vehicle more 360–degree turns (in an area free from
ignition switch is in the ON or START position. and may need to be driven several minutes
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message displayed in the EVIC turns off. The
• Display Units of Measure in: before the updated temperature is dis-
compass will now function normally.
To make your selection, press and release the played. Engine temperature can also affect
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or the displayed temperature, therefore tem- NOTE:
“METRIC” appears. perature readings are not updated when the A good calibration requires a level surface
vehicle is not moving. and an environment free from large metallic
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped objects such as buildings, bridges, under-
is being displayed. Press and release the The ECO message will display below the out- ground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the side temperature in the EVIC display. This
resettable function being displayed. To reset all

161

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Manual Compass Calibration should be set for the zone where the vehicle is 3. Press the DOWN button until “Compass
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, Variance” message and the last variance zone
indicator does not appear in the EVIC display, the compass will automatically compensate for number displays in the EVIC.
you must put the compass into the Calibration the differences and provide the most accurate 4. Press and release SELECT button until the
Mode manually as follows: compass heading.
proper variance zone is selected according to
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in NOTE: the map.
PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Magnetic materials should be kept away 5. Press and release the COMPASS button to
Menus. from the top of the instrument panel, this is exit.
2. Press the MENU button until the Personal where the compass sensor is located.
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
Personal Settings (Customer-
menu displays in the EVIC. Programmable Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate recall features when the vehicle speed is at
Compass” displays in the EVIC. 0 mph (0 km/h) (manual transmission) or when
4. Press and release the SELECT button to the shift lever is in PARK (auto transmission).
start the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will Press and release the MENU button until Per-
display in the EVIC. sonal Settings displays in the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in Use the DOWN button to display one of the
an area free from large metal or metallic ob- following choices:
jects) until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The
Compass Variance Map Language
compass will now function normally.
When in this display you may select one of five
Compass Variance 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
languages for all display nomenclature, includ-
Compass Variance is the difference between 2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for ing the trip functions and the navigation system
Magnetic North and Geographic North. To approximately two seconds. (if equipped). Press the SELECT button while in
compensate for the differences, the variance this display to select English, Espanol or Fran-
162

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 cais. Then, as you continue, the information will press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
display in the selected language. To make your selection, press and release the Opening either front vehicle door will cancel
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or this feature. To make your selection, press and
(24 km/h) “All Doors 1st Press” appears. release the SELECT button until “Off,”
“45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.” appears.
When on is selected, all doors will lock auto- Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of When on is selected, the front and rear turn Illumination Approach
15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, signals will flash when the doors are locked or When this feature is selected, the headlights
press and release the SELECT button until “On” unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds
or “Off” appears. may be selected with or without the sound horn when the doors are unlocked with the RKE
on lock feature selected. To make your selec- transmitter. To make your selection, press and
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
tion, press and release the SELECT button until hold the SELECT button until “Off,” “30 sec,”
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is “On” or “Off” appears. “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the Delay Turning Headlights Off Nav–Turn By Turn
driver’s door is opened. To make your selec- When this feature is selected, the driver can When this feature is selected, the navigation
tion, press and release the SELECT button until choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, system utilizes voice commands, guiding
“On” or “Off” appears. 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. through the drive route, mile by mile, turn-by-
Remote Key Unlock To make your selection, press and release the turn until the final destination is reached. To
SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” make your selection, press and release the
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only
appears. SELECT button until a check-mark appears
the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of
next to the feature showing the system has
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
been activated or the check-mark is removed,
UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is When this feature is selected, the power win-
showing the system has been deactivated.
selected, you must press the RKE transmitter dow switches, radio, hands–free system (if
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen- equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets When on is selected, the HSA system is active.
selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in

163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 “Starting And Operating” for system function the left-hand control is different depending on
and operating information. To make your selec- which mode you are in.
tion, press and release the SELECT button until The following describes the left-hand control
“On” or “Off” appears. operation in each mode.
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
Compass/Temperature display, this message
the next listenable station and pressing the
can be turned on or off. To make your selection,
bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the
press and release the SELECT button until
next listenable station.
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of The button located in the center of the left-hand
Compass Variance
Steering Wheel) control will tune to the next preset station that
Refer to “Compass Display” for more informa-
you have programmed in the radio preset
tion. The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch pushbutton.
Calibrate Compass with a pushbutton in the center and controls the
Refer to “Compass Display” for more informa- volume and mode of the sound system. Press- CD Player
tion. ing the top of the rocker switch will increase the Pressing the top of the switch once will go to
volume, and pressing the bottom of the rocker the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of
SOUND SYSTEMS switch will decrease the volume. the switch once will go to the beginning of the
Refer to your Sound Systems Booklet. current track, or to the beginning of the previ-
Pressing the center button will make the radio ous track if it is within one second after the
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO switch between the various modes available current track begins to play.
CONTROLS (AM/FM/SAT/CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
If you press the switch up or down twice, it
The remote sound system controls are located The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch plays the second track; three times, it will play
on the rear surface of the steering wheel. with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the third, etc.
Reach behind the wheel to access the
switches.
164

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The center button on the left side rocker switch NOTE: Manual Heating and Air Conditioning
has no function for a single-disc CD player. If you experience difficulty in playing a par-
However, when a multiple-disc CD player is ticular disc, it may be damaged (i.e.,
equipped on the vehicle, the center button will scratched, reflective coating removed, a
select the next available CD in the player. hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE good disc before considering disc player
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the service.
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
the surface. PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a
a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge. noisy performance from your radio. This condi- series of outer rotary dials and inner push
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid tion may be lessened or eliminated by relocat- knobs.
scratching the disc. ing the mobile phone antenna. This condition is Blower Control
not harmful to the radio. If your radio perfor-
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thin- Rotate this control to
mance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the
ner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays. regulate the amount of
repositioning of the antenna, it is recom-
5. Store the disc in its case after playing. air forced through the
mended that the radio volume be turned down
ventilation system in
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. or off during mobile phone operation.
any mode. The blower
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures CLIMATE CONTROLS speed increases as you
may become too high. The Air Conditioning and Heating System is move the control to the
designed to make you comfortable in all types right from the “O” (OFF)
of weather. position. There are
seven blower speeds.
165

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Temperature Control Mode Control (Air Direction) Bi-Level
Rotate this control to Rotate this control to Air is directed through the panel and
regulate the tempera- choose from several floor outlets.
ture of the air inside the patterns of air distribu-
passenger compart- tion. You can select ei- NOTE:
ment. Rotating the dial ther a primary mode as For all settings except full cold or full hot,
left into the blue area of identified by the sym- there is a difference in temperature between
the scale indicates bols on the control, or a the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air
cooler temperatures blend of two of these flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives
while rotating right into modes. The closer the improved comfort during sunny but cool
the red area indicates setting is to a particular conditions.
warmer temperatures. symbol, the more air distribution you receive
Floor
from that mode.
NOTE: Air is directed through the floor outlets
If your air conditioning performance seems Panel with a small amount flowing through the
lower than expected, check the front of the Air is directed through the outlets in the defrost and side window demist outlets.
A/C condenser located in front of the radia- instrument panel. These outlets can be
Mix
tor for an accumulation of dirt or insects. adjusted to direct airflow.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
Clean with a gentle water spray from behind NOTE: and side window demist outlets. This
the radiator and through the condenser. The center instrument panel outlets can be setting works best in cold or snowy
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce conditions that require extra heat to the
aimed so that they are directed toward the
airflow to the condenser, reducing air con- windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
rear seat passengers for maximum airflow
ditioning performance. comfort while reducing moisture on the wind-
to the rear.
shield.

166

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Defrost NOTE: Air Conditioning Control
Air is directed through the windshield • Continuous use of the recirculation mode Press this button to en-
and side window demist outlets. Use may make the inside air stuffy and win- gage the Air Condition-
this mode with maximum blower and dow fogging may occur. Extended use of ing. A light will illumi-
temperature settings for best windshield and this mode is not recommended. nate when the Air
side window defrosting. • The use of the recirculation mode in cold Conditioning System is
NOTE: or damp weather will cause windows to engaged. Rotating the
The air conditioning compressor operates in fog on the inside, because of moisture dial left into the blue
Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, buildup inside the vehicle. Select the Out- area of the scale indi-
even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is side Air position for maximum defogging. cates cooler tempera-
not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to • The A/C will engage automatically to pre- tures while rotating right
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel vent fogging when the recirculation but- into the red area indicates warmer tempera-
economy, use these modes only when nec- ton is pressed and the mode control is set tures.
essary. to panel or panel / floor. NOTE:
Recirculation Control • The A/C can be deselected manually with- The air conditioning compressor will not
Pressing the Recirculation Control out disturbing the mode control selection. engage until the engine has been running
button will put the system in recir- • When the ignition switch is turned to the for about 10 seconds.
culation mode. This can be used LOCK position, the recirculation feature
• MAX A/C
when outside conditions such as will be cancelled. For maximum cooling turn on the A/C and
smoke, odors, dust, or high humid- recirculation buttons at the same time.
ity are present. Activating recircu-
lation will cause the LED in the control button to • ECONOMY MODE
illuminate. After ten minutes, the system will If economy mode is desired, press the A/C
return to normal mode function and the LED will button to turn OFF the indicator light and the
turn off. A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature
control to the desired temperature.
167

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Temperature Control NOTE: NOTE:
(ATC) — If Equipped The AUTO position performs best for front • The temperature setting can be adjusted
seat occupants only. at anytime without affecting automatic
2. Dial in the tempera- operation.
ture you would like the • Pressing the Air Conditioning Control
system to maintain by button while in AUTO mode will cause the
rotating the Tempera- LED in the control button to flash three
ture Control knob. Once times and then turn off. This indicates
the comfort level is se- that the system is in AUTO mode and
lected, the system will requesting the air conditioning is not nec-
maintain that level auto- essary.
matically using the • If your air conditioning performance
heating system. Should seems lower than expected, check the
Automatic Temperature Control
the desired comfort level require air condition- front of the A/C condenser located in front
Automatic Operation ing, the system will automatically make the of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
The Automatic Temperature Control system au- adjustment. or insects. Clean with a gentle water
tomatically maintains the climate in the cabin of spray from behind the radiator and
You will experience the greatest efficiency by
the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the through the condenser. Fabric front fas-
simply allowing the system to function auto-
driver and passenger. cia protectors may reduce airflow to the
matically. Selecting the “O” (OFF) position on
condenser, reducing air conditioning per-
Operation of the system is quite simple. the blower control stops the system completely
formance.
and closes the outside air intake.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right)
and the Blower Control knob (on the left) to The recommended setting for maximum com-
AUTO. fort is 72°F (22°C) for the average person;
however, this may vary.

168

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Blower Control Manual Operation
For full automatic op- This system offers a full complement of manual
eration or for automatic override features, which consist of Blower Pre-
blower operation turn ferred Automatic, Mode Preferred Automatic, or
Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This
the knob to AUTO posi-
tion. In manual mode means the operator can override the blower,
the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
there are seven blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not
speeds that can be in-
desired. The blower can be set to any fixed
dividual selected. In off
blower speed by rotating the Blower Control
position the blower will
shut off. knob (on the left).
NOTE:
Please read the Automatic Temperature
Control Operation Chart that follows for de-
tails.

169

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 170

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The operator can override the AUTO mode • Floor • Air Conditioner Control
setting to change airflow distribution by rotating Air is directed through the floor outlets Press this button to turn
the Mode Control knob (on the right) to one of with a small amount flowing through the on the air conditioning
the following positions. defrost and side window demist outlets. during manual opera-
tion only. When the air
• Panel • Mix
Air is directed through the outlets in the Air is directed through the floor, defrost, conditioning is turned
on, cool dehumidified
instrument panel. These outlets can be and side window demist outlets. This
air will flow through the
adjusted to direct airflow. setting works best in cold or snowy
outlets selected with the
conditions that require extra heat to the
NOTE: Mode control dial. Press
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
The center instrument panel outlets can be comfort while reducing moisture on the wind- this button a second
aimed so that they are directed toward the time to turn OFF the air conditioning. An LED in
shield.
rear seat passengers for maximum airflow the button illuminates when manual compres-
to the rear. • Defrost sor operation is selected.
Air is directed through the windshield
• Bi-Level • Recirculation Control
and side window demist outlets. Use
Air is directed through the panel and The system will automatically con-
this mode with maximum blower and
floor outlets. trol recirculation. However, press-
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting. ing the Recirculation Control but-
NOTE: ton will temporarily put the system
in recirculation mode (ten min-
For all settings except full cold or full hot, utes). This can be used when out-
there is a difference in temperature between side conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air high humidity are present. Activating recircula-
flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives tion will cause the LED in the control button to
improved comfort during sunny but cool
conditions.

171

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 illuminate. After ten minutes, the system will modes will cause the LED in the control Summer Operation
return to normal AUTO mode function and the button to blink and then turn off. The engine cooling system in air-conditioned
LED will turn off. • Most of the time, when in Automatic Op- vehicles must be protected with a high-quality
eration, you can temporarily put the sys- antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
NOTE:
tem into Recirculation Mode by pressing protection and to protect against engine over-
• When the ignition switch is turned to the heating. A solution of 50% ethylene glycol
LOCK position, the recirculation feature the Recirculation button. However, under
certain conditions, while in Automatic antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recom-
will be cancelled. mended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
Mode, the system is blowing air out the
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation defrost vents. When these conditions are “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant
mode may lead to excessive window fog- present, and the Recirculation button is selection.
ging. The Recirculation mode is not al- pressed, the indicator will flash and then Winter Operation
lowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/floor turn off. This tells you that you are unable Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter
mode in order to improve window clear- to go into Recirculation Mode at this time. months is not recommended because it may
ing. Recirculation will be disabled auto- If you would like the system to go into cause window fogging.
matically if these modes are selected. Recirculation Mode, you must first move
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the Mode knob to Panel, Panel/Floor and Vacation Storage
the windows to fog. If the interior of the then press the Recirculation button. This Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
windows begins to fog, press the Recir- feature reduces the possibility of window service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
culation button to return to outside air. fogging. run the air conditioning system at idle for about
Some temp/humidity conditions will five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
cause captured interior air to condense Operating Tips settings. This will ensure adequate system lu-
on windows and hamper visibility. For NOTE: brication to minimize the possibility of compres-
this reason, the system will not allow sor damage when the system is started again.
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, for suggested control settings for various
defrost, or defrost/floor mode. Attempting weather conditions.
to use the recirculation while in these

172

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Window Fogging Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be Make sure the air intake, located directly in front
quickly removed by turning the mode selector of the windshield, is free of obstructions such
to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake
to maintain a clear windshield and provide may reduce airflow, and if they enter the ple-
sufficient heating. If side window fogging be- num, they could plug the water drains. In winter
comes a problem, increase blower speed. Ve- months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
hicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild slush, and snow.
but rainy or humid weather.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
NOTE: The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen
Recirculate without A/C should not be used from entering the cabin. The filter acts on air
for long periods as fogging may occur. coming from outside the vehicle and recircu-
lated air within the passenger compartment.
Side Window Demisters Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-
A side window demister outlet is located at taining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
each end of the instrument panel. These non- information or see your authorized dealer for
adjustable outlets direct air toward the side service. Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for
windows when the system is in the FLOOR, filter service intervals.
MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view
the outside mirrors.

173

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions

174

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5
STARTING AND OPERATING
• STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
• Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
• Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 180
• Normal Starting – Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
• Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C) . . . . . . . 180
• If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
• After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
• Normal Starting – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
• STOP/START SYSTEM — DIESEL MODELS WITH MANUAL
TRANSMISSION ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
• Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
• MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . 185
• Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
• Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
• Reverse Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

175

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . 187
• Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
• Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
• Four-Speed Automatic Transmission With Overdrive
(3.8L Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
• Five–Speed Automatic Transmission
(2.8L Diesel Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
• Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
• FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION (COMMAND-TRAC I姞 OR
ROCK-TRAC姞) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
• Operating Instructions/Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
• Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
• Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
• TRAC-LOK姞 REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . 196
• AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK姞) — RUBICON MODELS . . . . . . . 196
• ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF EQUIPPED . . 197
• ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
• OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
• Side Step Removal – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
• The Basics Of Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
• When To Use 4L (Low) Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
• Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation . . . . . . . . 199

176

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
• Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points) . . . 200
• Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
• Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
• After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
• POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
• Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
• PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
• ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
• ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . 208
• Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
• Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
• Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
• Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
• ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
• Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 216
• TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
• Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
• Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

177

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Tire Pressures For High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . 218
• Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
• Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
• Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
• Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
• Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
• TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
• TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . 221
• Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
• FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINES . . . . . . . . 224
• Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
• Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
• Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
• MMT in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
• Materials Added to Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
• FUEL REQUIREMENTS — DIESEL ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . 226
• ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
• Locking Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
• TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
• Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
• Breakaway Cable Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

178

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
• Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
• Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
• Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
• Trailer Hitch Attaching Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
• RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC) . . . 234
• Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . 234
• Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . 234

179

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING PROCEDURES 4WD Models Only ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to procedure.
fasten your seat belts. the floor. This feature enhances off-road perfor-
Tip Start Feature – Automatic Transmission
mance by allowing the vehicle to start when in
Only
WARNING! 4L without having to press the clutch pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the START position
• Do not leave children or animals inside The “4WD Indicator Light” will illuminate when
and release it as soon as the starter engages.
the transfer case has been shifted into this
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior The starter motor will continue to run, but will
mode.
heat build up may cause serious injury or automatically disengage itself when the engine
death. Automatic Transmission – If is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter
• Never leave children in the vehicle alone. Equipped will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If
Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is Start the engine with the shift lever in the this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
dangerous for a number of reasons. The
before shifting to any driving range. “Normal Starting” procedure.
child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. The child could operate power win- Normal Starting – Gasoline Engine Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F
dows, other controls or move the vehicle. or –29°C)
NOTE: To ensure reliable starting at these tempera-
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm tures, use of an externally powered electric
Manual Transmission – If Equipped engine is obtained without pumping or
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in engine block heater (available from your autho-
pressing the accelerator pedal. rized dealer) is recommended.
NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before
starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped Turn the ignition switch to the START position
with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will and release when the engine starts. If the
not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the
the floor.

180

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If Engine Fails To Start Without Tip Start (Manual Transmission erator pedal held to the floor, repeat the “Nor-
Only) mal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” pro-
WARNING! If the engine fails to start after you have fol- cedures.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids lowed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold With Tip Start (Automatic Transmission
Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push Only)
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor If the engine fails to start after you have fol-
attempt to start the vehicle. This could and hold it there while cranking the engine. This
result in a flash fire causing serious per- lowed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold
should clear any excess fuel in case the engine Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To
sonal injury. is flooded.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then,
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an CAUTION! turn the ignition switch to the START position
automatic transmission cannot be started To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank and release it as soon as the starter engages.
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the the engine for more than 15 seconds at a The starter motor will disengage automatically
catalytic converter and, once the engine time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the
has started, ignite and damage the con- again. accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the
verter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
discharged battery, booster cables may be If the engine has been flooded, it may start to repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
used to obtain a start from a booster battery run, but not have enough power to continue
or the battery in another vehicle. This type running when the key is released. If this occurs, CAUTION!
of start can be dangerous if done improp- continue cranking with the accelerator pedal To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to
erly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What to pushed all the way to the floor. Release the 15 seconds before trying again.
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
is running smoothly. After Starting
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two The idle speed will automatically decrease as
15–second periods of cranking with the accel- the engine warms up.

181

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Normal Starting – Diesel Engine NOTE: NOTE:
1. The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or The starter motor may run up to 30 seconds High-speed, no-load running of a cold en-
PARK position before you can start the engine. in very cold conditions until the engine is gine can result in excessive white smoke
started. The starter can be disengaged by and poor engine performance. No-load en-
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. turning the ignition key to the OFF position, gine speeds should be kept under 1,200 rpm
3. Watch for the “Wait To Start Light” in the if required. during the warm-up period, especially in
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” cold, ambient temperature conditions.
5. Without Tip Start Feature (Manual
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for Transmission Only) If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate
further review. It will glow for two to ten seconds Turn the ignition switch to the START position the engine at moderate speeds for five minutes
or more, depending on engine temperature. and release when the engine starts. If the before full loads are applied.
When the “Wait To Start Light” goes out, the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the
engine is ready to start. Engine Idling – In Cold Weather
ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to Avoid prolonged idling in ambient tempera-
4. Tip Start Feature (Automatic 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
tures below 0°F (-18°C). Long periods of idling
Transmission Only) procedure. may be harmful to your engine because com-
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition 6. After the engine starts, allow it to idle for bustion chamber temperatures can drop so low
key to the START position and then release it. approximately 30 seconds before driving. This that the fuel may not burn completely. Incom-
The starter motor will continue to run, and it will allows oil to circulate and lubricate the turbo- plete combustion allows carbon and varnish to
automatically disengage when the engine is charger. form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also,
running. If the engine fails to start, the starter the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
will disengage automatically in 20 seconds. If Engine Warm-Up
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the
this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
engine.
position, wait 25 to 30 seconds, then repeat the cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the
“Normal Starting” procedure. engine up to operating speed slowly to allow Stopping the Engine
the oil pressure to stabilize as the engine The following chart should be used as a guide
warms up. in determining the amount of engine idle time
required to sufficiently cool down the turbo-

182

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 charger before shut down, depending upon the charger. This is particularly necessary after oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from
type of driving and the amount of cargo. any period of hard driving. the combustion chamber, bearings, internal
Before turning off your turbo diesel engine, Idle the engine a few minutes before routine components, and turbocharger. This is espe-
always allow the engine to return to normal shutdown. After full load operation, idle the cially important for turbocharged, charge air
cooled engines.
idle speed and run for several seconds. This engine three to five minutes before shutting it
assures proper lubrication of the turbo- down. This idle period will allow the lubricating
TURBOCHARGER ⬙COOL DOWN⬙ CHART
Driving Conditions Load Turbocharger Temperature Idle Time (In Minutes) Before Shut
Down
Stop & Go Empty Cool Less than 1
Stop & Go Medium Warm 1
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2
City Traffic Max. GCWR Warm 3
Highway Speeds Max. GCWR Warm 4
Uphill Grade Max. GCWR Hot 5
STOP/START SYSTEM — DIESEL Automatic Mode To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP
MODELS WITH MANUAL The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every ACTIVE Mode, The Following Must Occur:
TRANSMISSION ONLY normal customer engine start. It will remain in 1. The system must be in STOP/START READY
The Stop/Start function is developed to save STOP/START NOT READY until you drive for- state. A STOP/START READY message will be
fuel and reduce emissions. The system will stop ward with a vehicle speed greater than 3 mph displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information
the engine automatically during a vehicle stop (5 km/h). At that time, the system will go into Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle In-
if the required conditions are met. Pressing the STOP/START READY and if all other conditions formation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
clutch pedal will automatically re-start the ve- are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
hicle. STOP ACTIVE mode.

183

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. Vehicle speed must be less 3 mph (5 km/h). • When driving in REVERSE • STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time ex-
3. Shifter must be in the NEUTRAL position • Hood is open ceeds 5 minutes
and the clutch pedal must be fully released • Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode • Battery voltage drops too low
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will • Low brake vacuum e.g. after several brake
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
fall to the Stop/Start position, the STOP/ pedal applications
several times without the STOP/START system
START AUTO STOP ACTIVE message will ap- going into a STOP/START READY state under • Vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h)
pear, and the heater/air conditioning (HVAC) air more extreme conditions of the items listed
flow will be reduced. • STOP/START OFF switch is pressed
above.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not • 4WD system is put into 4LO mode
To Start The Engine While In The
AUTO STOP Conditions that force a manual key cycle
STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE Mode
Prior to engine shut down, the system will start while in STOP/START AUTO STOP AC-
When the shift lever is in NEUTRAL, the engine
check many safety and comfort conditions to TIVE mode:
will start when the clutch pedal is pressed. The
see if they are fulfilled. In following situations vehicle will go into STOP/START SYSTEM NOT The Engine Will Not Start Automatically If:
the engine will not stop: READY mode until the vehicle speed is greater
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled than 3 mph (5 km/h). • The driver’s seatbelt was unbuckled
• Outside temperature is less than 1°F (–17°C) Conditions that will cause the engine to start • The engine hood has been opened
or greater than 104°F (40°C) automatically while in STOP/START AUTO • A STOP/START system error occurs
• Actual cabin temperature is significantly dif- STOP ACTIVE mode
The engine may then only be restarted with an
ferent than temperature set on Auto HVAC The Engine Will Start Automatically When: ignition key cycle. The STOP/START KEY
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode • Actual cabin temperature is significantly dif- START REQUIRED message will appear in the
ferent than temperature set on Auto HVAC Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Engine has not reached normal operating under these conditions. Refer to “Electronic
temperature • HVAC is set to full defrost mode
• Battery discharged
184

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under- 3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the The system will need to be checked by your
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in- STOP/START system) the engine will not be authorized dealer.
formation. stopped.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF
To Manually Turn Off The Start Stop 4. If the STOP/START system is manually EQUIPPED
System turned off. the engine can only be started and
stopped by cycling the ignition switch
1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located WARNING!
on the switch bank). The light on the switch will 5. The STOP/START system will reset itself You or others could be injured if you leave the
illuminate. back to an ON condition every time the key is vehicle unattended without having the parking
turned off and back on.
brake fully applied. The parking brake should
To Manually Turn On The Start Stop always be applied when the driver is not in the
System vehicle, especially on an incline.
1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located
on the switch bank). CAUTION!
2. The light on the switch will turn off. Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
System Malfunction pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this
system, the system will not shut down the will cause abnormal wear on the clutch.
STOP/START OFF Switch engine. A SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM
message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic
in Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument formation.
Panel” for further information.
185

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: Shifting Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
During cold weather, you may experience Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting To utilize your manual transmission efficiently
increased effort in shifting until the trans- gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly for both fuel economy and performance, it
mission fluid warms up. This is normal. press the accelerator pedal. should be upshifted as listed in recommended
shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds
You should always use first gear when starting
listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or
from a standing position if under heavy load or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift
when pulling a trailer. speeds may not apply.

Shift Pattern

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
3.8L Gasoline Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)
2.8L Diesel Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)

186

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Downshifting Maximum Recommended Downshift straight across and into the REVERSE area (the
Speeds driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifter
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear
passes the “knock-over”). Complete the shift
is recommended to preserve brakes when driv-
CAUTION! by pulling the shift lever into REVERSE.
ing down steep hills. In addition, downshifting
at the right time provides better acceleration Failure to follow the recommended downshift- The “knock-over” prevents the driver from ac-
when you desire to resume speed. Downshift ing speeds may cause the engine to over- cidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and
progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid over- speed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if warns the driver that they are about to shift the
speeding the engine and clutch. the clutch pedal is pressed. transmission into REVERSE. Due to this feature,
a slow shift to REVERSE can be perceived as a
WARNING! high shift effort.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds
Do not downshift for additional engine braking in MPH (KM/H) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could Gear EQUIPPED
lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid. Se- 3 to 2 to
6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3
lec- 2 1 CAUTION!
CAUTION! tion Damage to the transmission may occur if the
When descending a hill, be very careful to Maxi- 80 70 50 30 15 following precautions are not observed:
downshift one gear at a time to prevent over- mum (129) (113) (81) (48) (24) • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has
Speed
speeding the engine which can cause valve come to a complete stop.
damage, and/or clutch disc damage, even if Reverse Shifting • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
the clutch pedal is pressed. To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a vehicle has come to a complete stop and
complete stop. Press the clutch and pause the engine is at idle speed.
briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating.
(Continued)
Beginning from the NEUTRAL position, move
the shift lever in one quick, smooth motion

187

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 the LOCK position and once removed the shift
CAUTION! (Continued) lever is locked in PARK.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the Brake/Transmission Interlock
engine is above idle speed. System
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis-
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. sion Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the
shift lever in the PARK position when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON or START position and
WARNING! the brake pedal is not pressed. To move the
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition
PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is switch must be turned to either the ON or Shift Lever
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly START position (engine running or not) and the
brake pedal must be pressed. Gear Ranges
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could acceler-
ate quickly forward or in reverse. You could Four-Speed Automatic Transmission NOTE:
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or With Overdrive (3.8L Engine) Under extreme cold temperatures (-10°F
something. Only shift into gear when the Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE (or (-23°C) and when in DRIVE, transmission
engine is idling normally and when your foot is from P or R to D) should be done only after the operation may be briefly limited to only
firmly on the brake pedal. accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is second gear operation. Normal operation
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake will resume once the transmission tempera-
when moving the shift lever between these ture has risen to a suitable level.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition gears. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear
be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to range.
the LOCK position. The key can only be re-
moved from the ignition when the ignition is in

188

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 PARK REVERSE • The O/D OFF switch has not been activated.
This range supplements the parking brake by This range is for moving the vehicle backward. • Vehicle speed is above approximately
locking the transmission. The engine can be Use only after the vehicle has come to a 30 mph (48 km/h).
started in this range. Never use PARK while the complete stop.
vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake When frequent transmission shifting occurs
NEUTRAL while using Overdrive, such as when operating
when leaving the vehicle in this range. Always This range is used when vehicle is standing for
apply the parking brake first, then place the the vehicle under heavy load conditions (for
prolonged periods with engine running. Engine
shift lever in the PARK position. example, in hilly terrain, strong head winds, or
may be started in this range. Set the parking trailer towing), turning off overdrive will improve
brake if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING! performance and extend transmission life by
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute NOTE: reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
for the parking brake. Always apply the park- Towing, coasting, or driving the vehicle for
ing brake fully when parked to guard against any other reason with the shift lever in
vehicle movement and possible injury or NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission
damage. damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a Dis-
abled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergen-
PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is
cies” for further information.
higher than the idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could OVERDRIVE
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You This range is used for most city and highway
could lose control of the vehicle and hit driving. The transmission contains an
someone or something. Only shift into gear electronically-controlled fourth gear Overdrive, O/D OFF Switch
when the engine is idling normally and when and will automatically shift from DRIVE to
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the
present: O/D OFF switch located on the center console.
• The shift lever is in DRIVE. A indicator light in the instrument cluster will
189

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 illuminate to show that the switch has been
activated. When the indicator light is on, Over- CAUTION! CAUTION!
drive is locked out. Pressing the switch a sec- Continuing to drive with the Transmission • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK,
ond time restores the Overdrive function. The Temperature “HOTOIL” Warning Message il- you must turn the ignition from LOCK so
lockout feature is useful when towing a trailer or luminated will eventually cause severe trans- the steering wheel and shift lever are re-
carrying a heavy load. mission damage or transmission failure. leased. Otherwise, damage to the steering
If the transmission overheats, a “HOTOIL” mes- column or shift lever could result.
2 (Second) • Never race the engine with the brakes on
sage may be displayed in the odometer (ac- This range is used for moderate grades and to
companied by a chime sound). If the “HOTOIL” and the vehicle in gear, and never hold the
assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and
message turns on, stop the vehicle and run the snow. The vehicle begins from a stop in low vehicle on an incline without applying the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in gear with automatic upshift to second gear. The brakes. These practices can overheat and
NEUTRAL until the message turns off. vehicle will not shift into third gear. damage the transmission.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving
1 (First)
WARNING! between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not
This range is used for hard pulling at low
If the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL” speeds in mud, sand, snow, or on steep spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
Warning Message is illuminated and you con- grades. The vehicle begins and stays in low (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
tinue operating the vehicle, in some circum- gear with no upshift. This gear provides engine
stances you could cause the fluid to boil over, compression braking at low speeds. Transmission Limp Home Mode
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust Transmission function is monitored for abnor-
components and cause a fire. mal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, the Trans-
mission Limp Home Mode will be engaged. In
this mode, the transmission will operate (when
in DRIVE) in second gear only.

190

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To reset the transmission, use the following feeling or response during normal operation in PARK
procedure: high gear. When the vehicle speed drops or This gear position supplements the parking
1. Stop the vehicle. during acceleration, the clutch automatically brake by locking the transmission. The engine
and smoothly disengages. can be started in this range. Never use PARK
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position. while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
Five–Speed Automatic Transmission brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
3. Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the (2.8L Diesel Engine)
key fob to the LOCK position. Always apply the parking brake first, then place
The electronically controlled transmission pro- the shift lever in the PARK position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart vides a precise shift schedule. The transmis-
the engine. sion electronics are self-calibrating; therefore,
the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be WARNING!
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition • Never use the PARK position as a substitute
range. and precision shifts will develop within a few for the parking brake. Always apply the park-
If the problem is no longer detected, the trans- hundred miles/kilometers. ing brake fully when parked to guard against
mission will return to normal operation. If the vehicle movement and possible injury or
problem persists, PARK, REVERSE, and NEU-
Gear Ranges damage.
TRAL will continue to operate. Only second NOTE: • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of
gear will operate in the DRIVE position. Have After selecting any gear range, wait a mo- PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is
the transmission checked at your authorized ment to allow the selected gear to engage higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
dealer as soon as possible. before accelerating. This is especially im- firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
Torque Converter Clutch portant when the engine is cold. If there is a accelerate quickly forward or in REVERSE.
A feature designed to improve fuel economy need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
has been added to the automatic transmission the key to the LOCK position before restart- someone or something. Only shift into gear
of this vehicle. A clutch within the torque con- ing. Transmission gear engagement may be when the engine is idling normally and when
verter engages automatically at calibrated delayed after restarting the engine if the key your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
speeds. This may result in a slightly different is not cycled to the LOCK position first.

191

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 REVERSE Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation NOTE:
Use this range only after the vehicle has come The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control To select the proper gear position for maxi-
to a complete stop. allows you to move the shift lever left (-) or right mum deceleration (engine braking), move
NEUTRAL (+) when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the shift lever to the left “D (-)” and hold it
allowing the selection of the desired top gear. there. The transmission will shift to the
Shift into NEUTRAL when the vehicle is stand-
ing for prolonged periods with the engine run- For example, if the driver shifts the transmission range from which the vehicle can best be
into third gear, the transmission will never shift slowed down.
ning. The engine may be started in this range.
above third gear, but can shift down to second
Set the parking brake if you must leave the Overdrive Operation
gear or first gear, when needed.
vehicle. The overdrive automatic transmission contains
NOTE: an electronically controlled fifth gear (OVER-
WARNING! DRIVE). The transmission will automatically
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for Do not downshift for additional engine braking
any other reason with the shift lever in shift from fourth gear to OVERDRIVE if the
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could following conditions are present:
NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission lose their grip and the vehicle could skid.
damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in • the shift lever is in DRIVE
“Starting and Operating” and “Towing a Dis-
• the engine coolant has reached normal op-
abled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergen- Screen Display 1 2 3 4 D
erating temperature
cies” for further information. Actual Gear(s) 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5
Allowed • the vehicle speed is above approximately
DRIVE
30 mph (48 km/h)
The transmission automatically upshifts
through fifth gear. The DRIVE position provides • the transmission has reached normal oper-
optimum driving characteristics under all nor- ating temperature
mal operating conditions.

192

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: mission Limp Home Mode will be engaged. In Torque Converter Clutch
If the vehicle is started in extremely cold this mode, the transmission will remain in the A feature designed to improve fuel economy
temperatures, the transmission may not current gear until the vehicle is brought to a has been included in the automatic transmis-
shift into OVERDRIVE and will automatically stop. sion on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque
select the most desirable gear for operation converter engages automatically at a cali-
To reset the transmission, use the following
at this temperature. Normal operation will procedure: brated speed at light throttle. It engages at
resume when the transmission fluid tem- higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This
perature has risen to a suitable level. Refer 1. Stop the vehicle. may result in a slightly different feeling or
to the “Note” under “Torque Converter 2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position. response during normal operation in high gear.
Clutch” later in this section. When the vehicle speed drops below a cali-
3. Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the brated speed, or during acceleration, the
During cold temperature operation, you may key to the LOCK position. clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
notice delayed upshifts depending on en-
gine and transmission temperature. This 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart NOTE:
feature improves the warm up time of the the engine. If the vehicle has not been driven in several
engine and transmission. 5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear days, the first few seconds of operation after
During cold temperature operation, the range. shifting the transmission into gear may
transmission may not downshift from sec- seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid par-
If the problem is no longer detected, the trans-
ond gear into first gear after the initial first to mission will return to normal operation. If the tially draining from the torque converter into
second gear upshift. the transmission. This condition is normal
problem persists, PARK, REVERSE, and NEU-
and will not cause damage to the transmis-
Transmission Limp Home Mode TRAL will continue to operate. Only second
sion. The torque converter will refill within
Transmission function is monitored for abnor- gear range will operate in the DRIVE position.
mal conditions. If a condition is detected that Have the transmission checked at your autho- five seconds of starting the engine.
could result in transmission damage, the Trans- rized dealer as soon as possible.

193

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION The transfer case is intended to be driven in the NOTE:
(COMMAND-TRAC I姞 OR 2H position for normal street and highway Do not attempt to shift when only the front or
ROCK-TRAC姞) conditions such as hard-surfaced roads. rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case
In the event that additional traction is required, is not equipped with a synchronizer, and the
Operating Instructions/Precautions front and rear driveshaft speeds must be
the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be
The transfer case provides four mode posi- equal for a shift to take place. Shifting while
used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
tions: only the front or rear wheels are spinning
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
• 2H (Two-wheel drive high range) rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished can cause damage to the transfer case.
• 4H (Four-wheel drive high range) by simply moving the shift lever to one of these When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
positions. The 4H and 4L positions are in- speed will be approximately three times (four
• N (Neutral) tended for loose, slippery road surfaces only times for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H
• 4L (Four-wheel drive low range) and not intended for normal driving. Driving in positions at a given road speed. Take care not
the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced to overspeed the engine.
roads will cause increased tire wear and dam-
age to the driveline components. Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the in- circumference on each wheel. Any difference
strument cluster) alerts the driver that the ve- will adversely affect shifting and cause damage
hicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and to the transfer case.
rear driveshafts are locked together. The light
will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted Because four-wheel drive provides improved
into the 4H position. traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Four-Wheel Drive Shift Controls

194

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 provides additional traction for loose, slippery NOTE:
WARNING! road surfaces and should not be used on dry
You or others could be injured if you leave the When in 4WD, the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
pavement. will display in the instrument cluster.
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in
the N (Neutral) position without first fully en- The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the in- Shifting Procedure
strument cluster) will illuminate when the trans-
gaging the parking brake. The transfer case N 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H
fer case is shifted into the 4H position.
(Neutral) position disengages both the front Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with
and rear driveshaft from the powertrain, and N (Neutral) Position the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the
will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the This range disengages the front and rear drive- vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
shafts from the powertrain. It is to be used for disengage faster if you momentarily release the
transmission position. The parking brake
flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to accelerator pedal after completing the shift.
should always be applied when the driver is “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operat-
not in the vehicle. Apply a constant force when shifting the trans-
ing” for further information. fer case lever.
Shift Positions 4L Position 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
For additional information on the appropriate together, forcing the front and rear wheels to 5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into
use of each transfer case mode position, see rotate at the same speed. This range (4L) NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a
the information below: provides additional traction and maximum pull- manual transmission. While the vehicle is
2H Position ing power for loose, slippery road surfaces coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
This range is used for normal street and high- only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). transfer case lever firmly to the desired posi-
way driving on hard-surfaced roads. The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the in- tion. Do not pause with the transfer case in N
4H Position strument cluster) will illuminate when the trans- (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts fer case is shifted into the 4L position. the automatic transmission into DRIVE or re-
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to lease the clutch pedal on a manual transmis-
rotate at the same speed. This range (4H) sion.

195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: rear wheels, the differential automatically pro-
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the portions the usable torque by providing more
vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi- torque to the wheel that has traction.
culty may occur due to the mating teeth not Trac-Lok姞 is especially helpful during slippery
being properly aligned. Several attempts driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
may be required for clutch teeth alignment slippery surface, a slight application of the
and shift completion to occur. The preferred accelerator will supply maximum traction.
method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to
WARNING!
engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differ-
moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
ential, never run the engine with one rear Axle Lock Switch
wheel off the ground. The vehicle may drive This feature will only activate when the following
WARNING!
Failure to engage a position completely can through the rear wheel remaining on the conditions are met:
ground and cause you to lose control of your
cause transfer case damage or loss of power • Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
and vehicle control. You could have a colli- vehicle.
• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h)
sion. Do not drive the vehicle unless the or less.
transfer case is fully engaged. AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK姞) —
RUBICON MODELS To activate the system, press the bottom of the
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instru- AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle
TRAC-LOK姞 REAR AXLE — IF ment panel (to the left of the steering column). only (the “Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light” will
EQUIPPED illuminate), press the bottom of the switch again
The Trac-Lok姞 rear axle provides a constant to lock the front axle (the “Front Axle Lock
driving force to both rear wheels and reduces Indicator Light” will illuminate). When the rear
wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one axle is locked, pressing the switch again will
driving wheel. If traction differs between the two lock or unlock the front axle.
196

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE:
WARNING!
The indicator lights will flash until the axles Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive
are fully locked or unlocked.
on hard-surfaced roads or at speeds above
To unlock the axles, press the top of the AXLE 18 mph (29 km/h); you may lose control of the
LOCK switch. vehicle, which could result in serious injury.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle sta-
out of 4L (Low) range, or the ignition switch is bility and is necessary for maintaining control
turned to the OFF position. of the vehicle. The system monitors vehicle
speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabi-
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR
Sway Bar Switch lizer bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h).
DISCONNECT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an elec- This is indicated by a flashing or solid “Sway
Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the Bar Indicator Light.” Once vehicle speed is
tronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system. Press the switch again to deactivate
system allows greater front suspension travel in reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the system
the system. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light”
off-road situations. (located in the instrument cluster) will illuminate will once again attempt to return to off-road
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar mode.
switch located on the instrument panel (to the Indicator Light” will flash during activation tran-
left of the steering column). sition, or when activation conditions are not To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to
met. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in either 4H or 4L and press the SWAY BAR switch
on-road mode during normal driving condi- to obtain the off-road position. Refer to “Four-
tions. Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for further information. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/
sway bar has been fully disconnected.

197

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
locked due to left and right suspension and a narrower track to make them capable of
height differences. This condition is due to performing in a wide variety of off-road appli-
driving surface differences or vehicle load- cations. Specific design characteristics give
ing. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to them a higher center of gravity than ordinary
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left cars.
halves of the bar must be aligned. This An advantage of the higher ground clearance
alignment may require that the vehicle be is a better view of the road, allowing you to
driven onto level ground or rocked from side anticipate problems. They are not designed for
to side. cornering at the same speeds as conventional
2. Remove one bolt from the underside of the
To return to on-road mode, press the SWAY two-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-
vehicle.
BAR switch again. slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all
WARNING! possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to vers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure
to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
on-road mode, vehicle stability is greatly re-
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
duced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle
over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss of control of
Side Step Removal – If Equipped
the vehicle, which could result in serious
injury. Contact your local authorized dealer for NOTE:
assistance. Prior to off-road usage, the side steps
should be removed to prevent damage. 3. Remove the side step assembly.
1. Remove the two nuts from the bodyside.
198

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Basics Of Off-Road Driving Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
CAUTION!
You will encounter many types of terrain driving Operation
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or
off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain Many off-road driving conditions require the
and area before proceeding. There are many other combustible materials. The heat from
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle
types of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt, your vehicle exhaust system could cause a (two-footed driving). When climbing rocks,
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. fire. logs, or other stepped objects, using light
Every surface has a different effect on your brake pressure with light throttle will keep the
vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Con- WARNING! vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique
trolling your vehicle is one of the keys to suc- Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down is also used when you need to stop and restart
cessful off-road driving, so always keep a firm a vehicle on a steep incline.
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projec-
grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good
driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, tiles in an off-road situation. Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
turns or braking. In most cases, there are no Snow
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. When To Use 4L (Low) Range In heavy snow or for additional control and
Therefore, you will need to use your own good When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission
judgment on what is safe and what is not. When additional traction and control on slippery or into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L
on a trail, you should always be looking ahead difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear
for surface obstacles and changes in terrain. hills, and to increase low speed pulling power. than necessary to maintain headway. Over-
The key is to plan your future driving route while This range should be limited to extreme situa- revving the engine can spin the wheels and
remembering what you are currently driving tions such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop,
over. or sand where additional low speed pulling try turning your steering wheel no more than a
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 1/4 turn quickly back and forth, while still ap-
25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in plying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a
4L (Low) range. fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help maintain your momentum.

199

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sand Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And
CAUTION! Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at Other High Points)
full tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandy While driving off-road, you will encounter many
high engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle’s momen- types of terrain. These varying types of terrain
engine braking may cause skidding and loss tum and do not stop. The key to driving in soft bring different types of obstacles. Before pro-
of control. sand is using the appropriate tire pressure, ceeding, review the path ahead to determine
accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneu- the correct approach and your ability to safely
Mud vers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction If you are going to be driving on large soft Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring
around the tires and is very difficult to get sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pres- the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch
through. You should use second gear (manual sure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow the vehicle forward until it makes contact with
transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmis- for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire the object. Apply the throttle lightly while hold-
sion), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low) pressure will drastically improve your traction ing a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle
position to maintain your momentum. If you and handling while driving on the soft sand, but up and over the object.
start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering you must return the tires to normal air pressure
wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and before driving on pavement or other hard sur-
WARNING!
forth for additional traction. Mud holes pose an faces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering
increased threat of vehicle damage and getting tires prior to reducing the pressure.
stuck. They are normally full of debris from system loading which could cause you to
previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good loose control of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
practice before entering any mud hole, get out Reduced tire pressures may cause tire un-
and determine how deep it is, if there are any Using A Spotter
seating and total loss of air pressure. To There are many times where it is hard to see the
hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be
reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a obstacle or determine the correct path. Deter-
safely recovered if stuck.
reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and mining the correct path can be extremely diffi-
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. cult when you are confronting many obstacles.
In these cases, have someone guide you over,
200

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 through, or around the obstacle. Have the Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Crossing Logs
person stand a safe distance in front of you Or Rut To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle
where they can see the obstacle, watch your When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows
tires and undercarriage, and guide you a large rut, the angled approach is the key to one front tire to be on top of the log while the
through. maintaining your vehicle’s mobility. Approach other just starts to climb the log. While climbing
these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
Crossing Large Rocks
each tire go through the obstacle indepen- avoid spinning the log out from under your tires.
When approaching large rocks, choose a path
dently. You need to use caution when crossing Then ease the vehicle off the log using your
which ensures you drive over the largest of
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not at- brakes.
them with your tires. This will lift your undercar-
tempt to cross any large obstacle with steep
riage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire is
sides at an angle great enough to put the CAUTION!
tougher and thicker than the side wall and is
vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater
designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead
a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a diameter than the running ground clearance
and make every effort to cross the large rocks
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use
with your tires. or the vehicle will become high-centered.
the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the
turnout you just created. You should now be
CAUTION! able to drive out following the trench you just Getting High-Centered
• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is created at a 45-degree angle. If you get hung up or high-centered on an
large enough to strike your axles or under- object, get out of the vehicle and try to deter-
carriage. mine what the vehicle is hung up on, where it is
WARNING! contacting the underbody and what is the best
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is There is an increased risk of rollover when direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on
large enough to contact the door sills. crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up
sides. and place a few rocks under the tires so the
weight is off of the high point when you let the
vehicle down. You can also try rocking the
vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.

201

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 lower gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and pro-
CAUTION! ceed with caution, maintaining your momentum WARNING!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard ob- as you climb the hill. Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or
jects increases the risk of underbody damage. turn around on a steep grade. Driving across
Driving Up Hill an incline increases the risk of a rollover,
Hill Climbing Once you have determined your ability to pro-
which may result in severe injury.
ceed and have shifted into the appropriate
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a
gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest
good understanding of your abilities and your Driving Downhill
possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant
vehicle’s limitations. Hills can cause serious Before driving down a steep hill, you need to
throttle and apply more power as you start up
problems. Some are just too steep to climb and determine if it is too steep for a safe descent.
the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade;
should not be attempted. You should always What is the surface traction? Is the grade too
the abrupt change of grade could cause you to
feel confident with the vehicle and your abili- steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent?
lose control. If the front end begins to bounce,
ties. You should always climb hills straight up Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is
ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires
and down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to
angle. back on the ground. As you approach the crest
regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If
of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly
Before Climbing A Steep Hill you feel confident in your ability to proceed,
proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or then make sure you are in 4L (Low) and pro-
as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the
steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to ceed with caution. Allow engine braking to
accelerator and maintain headway by turning
see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is control the descent and apply your brakes, if
the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn
the trail straight up and down? What is on top necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh
and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, ⬙bite⬙ into the surface and will usually provide
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can enough traction to complete the climb. If you
you safely recover the vehicle if something do not make it to the top, place the vehicle in
goes wrong? If everything looks good and you REVERSE and back straight down the grade
feel confident, shift the transmission into a using engine resistance along with the vehicle
brakes.

202

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE. lightly and avoid damage to the environment.
WARNING! Back slowly down the hill allowing engine brak- You should know your vehicle’s abilities and be
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. ing to control the descent and apply your able to recover it if something goes wrong. You
Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires should never stop or shut a vehicle off when
braking. Descending a grade too fast could to lock. crossing deep water unless you ingested water
cause you to lose control and be seriously into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do
injured. WARNING! not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or ingested water first. The key to any crossing is
Driving Across An Incline cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or low and slow. Shift into first gear (manual
If at all possible, avoid driving across an in- transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmis-
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
cline. If it is necessary, know your vehicle’s sion), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low)
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, position and proceed very slowly with a con-
abilities. Driving across an incline places more
weight on the downhill wheels, which increases which may result in severe injury. Always back stant slow speed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h)
the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE maximum} and light throttle. Keep the vehicle
Make sure the surface has good traction with gear. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL moving; do not try to accelerate through the
firm and stable soils. If possible, transverse the using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive crossing. After crossing any water higher than
incline at an angle heading slightly up or down. diagonally across a hill; always drive straight the bottom of the axle differentials, you should
up or down. inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water
WARNING! ingestion.
Driving across an incline increases the risk of Driving Through Water
a rollover, which may result in severe injury. Extreme care should be taken crossing any
type of water. Water crossings should be
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway avoided, if possible, and only be attempted
If you stall or begin to lose headway while when necessary in a safe, responsible manner.
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come You should only drive through areas which are
to a stop and immediately apply the brake. designated and approved. You should tread

203

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 a safe crossing is the water depth, current and Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers
CAUTION! bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle Or Other Flowing Water
• Water ingestion into the axles, transmis- will sink in, effectively increasing the water level Flowing water can be extremely dangerous.
sion, transfer case, engine or vehicle inte- on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or
rior can occur if you drive too fast or determining the depth and the ability to safely river even in shallow water. Fast moving water
through too deep of water. Water can cross. can easily push your vehicle downstream,
cause permanent damage to engine, drive- sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas
line or other vehicle components, and your water, a high current can still wash the dirt out
Or Other Standing Water
brakes will be less effective once wet from around your tires putting you and your
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water
and/or muddy. vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of
areas normally contain murky or muddy waters.
• This vehicle is capable of crossing through personal injury and vehicle damage with slower
These water types normally contain hidden
water currents in depths greater than the vehi-
water at a depth of 30 inches (76 cm) at obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
cle’s running ground clearance. You should
speeds no greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). accurate water depth, approach angle, and
never attempt to cross flowing water which is
Water ingestion can occur causing damage bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes
deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clear-
to your vehicle. are where you want to hook up tow straps prior
ance. Even the slowest current can push the
to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and
heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control
easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water if the water is deep enough to push on the large
determine you can safely cross, than proceed
As you approach any type of water, you need to surface area of the vehicle’s body. Before you
determine if you can cross it safely and respon- using the low and slow method.
proceed, determine the speed of the current,
sibly. If necessary, get out and walk through the the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom
water or probe it with a stick. You need to be CAUTION! condition and if there are any obstacles. Then
sure of its depth, approach angle, current and Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system cross at an angle heading slightly upstream
bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy effectiveness by depositing debris onto the using the low and slow technique.
waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure radiator.
you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you
can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to
204

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Check for accumulations of plants or brush. pacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
WARNING! These things could be a fire hazard. They ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It might hide damage to fuel lines, brake the situation.
can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller
it out of control. This could put you and your shafts. POWER STEERING
passengers at risk of injury or drowning. The standard power steering system will give
• After extended operation in mud, sand, wa-
ter, or similar dirty conditions, have the ra- you good vehicle response and increased ease
After Driving Off-Road diator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake lin- of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system
Off-road operation puts more stress on your ings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned will provide mechanical steering capability if
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After as soon as possible. power assist is lost.
going off-road, it is always a good idea to
If for some reason the power assist is inter-
check for damage. That way you can get any
WARNING! rupted, it will still be possible to steer your
problems taken care of right away and have
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes vehicle. Under these conditions, you will ob-
your vehicle ready when you need it.
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable serve a substantial increase in steering effort,
• Completely inspect the underbody of your braking. You might not have full braking power especially at very low vehicle speeds and
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steer- during parking maneuvers.
when you need it to prevent a collision. If you
ing, suspension, and exhaust system for
have been operating your vehicle in dirty NOTE:
damage.
conditions, get your brakes checked and • Increased noise levels at the end of the
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and cleaned as necessary. steering wheel travel are considered nor-
clean as required. mal and do not indicate that there is a
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, • If you experience unusual vibration after problem with the power steering system.
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain com- driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the
ponents, steering, and suspension. Re- check the wheels for impacted material. Im- power steering pump may make noise for
tighten them, if required, and torque to the a short amount of time. This is due to the
values specified in the Service Manual. cold, thick fluid in the steering system.

205

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 This noise should be considered normal, to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or
and it does not in any way damage the CAUTION! manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
steering system. Do not use chemical flushes in your power
steering system as the chemicals can dam- The parking brake lever is located in the center
age your power steering components. Such console. To apply the parking brake, pull the
WARNING! lever up as firmly as possible. To release the
Continued operation with reduced power damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press
steering assist could pose a safety risk to Limited Warranty. the center button, then lower the lever com-
yourself and others. Service should be ob- pletely.
tained as soon as possible. WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level
CAUTION! surface and with the engine off to prevent
Prolonged operation of the steering system at injury from moving parts and to ensure accu-
the end of the steering wheel travel will in- rate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use
crease the steering fluid temperature and it only manufacturer’s recommended power
should be avoided when possible. Damage to steering fluid.
the power steering pump may occur.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any
Power Steering Fluid Check spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids,
Checking the power steering fluid level at a Parking Brake
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
defined service interval is not required. The Your Vehicle” for further information. When the parking brake is applied with the
fluid should only be checked if a leak is sus- ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in
pected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or PARKING BRAKE the instrument cluster will illuminate.
the system is not functioning as anticipated. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho- parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain
rized dealer.
206

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE:
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)
• When the parking brake is applied and the • Never use the PARK position on an auto- • Always fully apply the parking brake when
automatic transmission is placed in gear,
matic transmission as a substitute for the leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will parking brake. Always apply the parking damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave
sound to alert the driver. Fully release the brake fully when parked to guard against an automatic transmission in PARK, a
parking brake before attempting to move vehicle movement and possible injury or manual transmission in REVERSE or first
the vehicle. damage. gear. Failure to do so may cause the ve-
• This light only shows that the parking • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. hicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
brake is applied. It does not show the Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is
degree of brake application. dangerous for a number of reasons. A child CAUTION!
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the or others could be seriously or fatally in- If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill jured. the parking brake released, a brake system
grade and away from the curb on an uphill • Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child malfunction is indicated. Have the brake sys-
grade. For vehicles equipped with an auto- could operate power windows, other con- tem serviced by an authorized dealer imme-
matic transmission, apply the parking brake trols, or move the vehicle. diately.
before placing the shift lever in PARK, other- • Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
wise the load on the transmission locking gaged before driving; failure to do so can
mechanism may make it difficult to move the lead to brake failure and a collision. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed
should always be applied whenever the driver (Continued) to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control
is not in the vehicle. under adverse braking conditions. The system
operates with a separate computer to modulate
hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up
and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

207

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same
size and type, and tires must be properly WARNING! CAUTION!
inflated to produce accurate signals for the • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will dimin- The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to
computer. ish their effectiveness and may lead to a possible detrimental effects of electronic inter-
collision. Pumping makes the stopping dis- ference caused by improperly installed after-
WARNING! tance longer. Just press firmly on your market radios or telephones.
Significant over or under-inflation of tires, or brake pedal when you need to slow down
mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle or stop. NOTE:
can lead to loss of braking effectiveness. • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
prevent the natural laws of physics from sensation may occur and a clicking noise
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low acting on the vehicle, nor can they increase will be heard. This is normal, indicating that
speed self-test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If for braking or steering efficiency beyond that the Anti-Lock Brake System is functioning.
any reason your foot is on the brake when the afforded by the condition of the vehicle ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL
vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h), this check brakes and tires or the traction afforded. SYSTEM
will be delayed until 25 mph (40 km/h). • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, includ- Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs ing those resulting from excessive speed in electronic brake control system that includes
during the self-test, and during an ABS stop, to turns, following another vehicle too closely, Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control
provide the regulated hydraulic pressure. The or hydroplaning. System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill
motor pump makes a low humming noise dur- • The capabilities of an ABS-equipped ve- Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation
ing operation; this is normal. hicle must never be exploited in a reckless (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Trailer
or dangerous manner which could jeopar- Sway Control (TSC), and Hill Descent Control
dize the user’s safety or the safety of (HDC). All of these systems work together to
others. enhance vehicle stability and control in various
driving conditions, and are commonly referred
to as ESC.

208

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow
WARNING! more engine torque to be applied to the wheel WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot that is not spinning. This feature remains active The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot pre-
prevent the natural laws of physics from act- even if TCS and ESC are in either the “Partial vent the natural laws of physics from acting on
ing on the vehicle, nor can they increase the Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer to “Electronic the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
traction afforded by prevailing road condi- Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
tions. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, information. BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
including those resulting from excessive Brake Assist System (BAS) those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
speed in turns, driving on very slippery sur- The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
faces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an braking capability during emergency braking planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
ABS-equipped vehicle must never be ex- maneuvers. The system detects an emergency vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner braking situation by sensing the rate and or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the amount of brake application and then applies the user’s safety or the safety of others.
safety of others. optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS comple- Hill Start Assist (HSA)
Traction Control System (TCS) ments the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Apply- The HSA system is designed to assist the driver
ing the brakes very quickly results in the best when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure
of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is system, you must apply continuous braking the driver applied for a short period of time after
detected, brake pressure is applied to the pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal.
slipping wheel(s) to provide enhanced accel- reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is If the driver does not apply the throttle during
eration and stability. A feature of the TCS sys- no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is this short period of time, the system will release
tem functions similar to a limited slip differential released, the BAS is deactivated. brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down
and controls the wheel spin across a driven
the hill. The system will release brake pressure
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the

209

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 in proportion to amount of throttle applied as • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direc- HSA On Manual Transmission Vehicles
the vehicle starts to move in the intended tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward The system will work in REVERSE, forward
direction of travel. gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gears, and NEUTRAL on manual transmission
gear). equipped vehicles. The system does not rec-
WARNING! ognize NEUTRAL on manual vehicles, thus it
If the clutch pedal (manual transmission only) WARNING! will hold the vehicle on an incline for a short
remains pressed during the application of the There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., period while in NEUTRAL, regardless of clutch
less than 8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while position. To prevent this, do not attempt to roll
throttle, the HSA will disengage allowing the
down a hill simply by putting the transmission in
vehicle to roll down the incline. This could pulling a trailer where the system will not
NEUTRAL and letting gravity act on the vehicle,
cause a collision with another vehicle or ob- activate and slight rolling may occur, which as the HSA will prevent the vehicle from rolling.
ject. To avoid this, do not apply throttle while could cause a collision with another vehicle or Instead, use the appropriate gear for moving in
pressing the clutch pedal until you are ready object. Always remember the driver is respon- the desired direction.
to release the clutch. Always remember the sible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. HSA will provide assistance when starting on a
The system will only work if the intended direc- grade when pulling a trailer.
HSA Activation Criteria tion of the vehicle and vehicle gear match. For
The following criteria must be met in order for example, if the intended direction is forward up
HSA to activate: a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE (automatic
transmission equipped vehicle), and the acti-
• Vehicle must be stopped vation criteria are met, HSA will activate.
• Vehicle must be on an 8% or greater incline HSA On Automatic Transmission Vehicles
(3% for manual transmission equipped ve- The system will work in REVERSE, and all
hicles) forward gears on vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL.

210

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: 6. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your The HSA system may also be turned on and 7. If the sequence was completed properly, the
off if the vehicle is equipped with the Elec- “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Re- will blink several times to confirm HSA is off.
and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, fer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
when the brake pedal is released there (EVIC) in “Understanding Your Instrument Steps 1-7 must be completed within 90 sec-
may not be enough brake pressure to hold Panel” for further information. onds to turn off HSA. Repeat steps 1-7 to
the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this re-enable HSA functionality.
HSA Off
could cause a collision with another vehicle If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
or object behind you. In order to avoid this procedure: This system anticipates the potential for wheel
rolling down the hill while resuming accel- lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel
1. Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM
eration, manually activate the trailer brake
(automatic transmission) or NEUTRAL with determines that the rate of change of the steer-
prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always clutch out (manual transmission) with wheels
remember the driver is responsible for ing wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are suffi-
straight. Apply parking brake on manual trans- cient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies
braking the vehicle. mission vehicle. the appropriate brake and may reduce engine
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the
2. Start the engine. power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
vehicle on a hill without putting the trans- occur. ERM will only intervene during very
mission in PARK and using the parking 3. With the engine running, the brake applied,
severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
brake, it will roll down the hill and could and the clutch out, rotate the steering wheel
180° counterclockwise from center. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) can only re-
cause a collision with another vehicle or
duce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
object. Always remember to use the park- 4. Press the ESC OFF switch four times within
severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
ing brake while parking on a hill, and that twenty seconds.
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as
the driver is responsible for braking the 5. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise road conditions, leaving the roadway or striking
vehicle. (180° clockwise from center). objects or other vehicles.

211

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting accelerator and apply as little throttle as pos-
Anytime the ESC system is in the “Full Off” the over/under steer condition. Engine power sible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving
mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to Electronic may also be reduced to help the vehicle main- to the prevailing road conditions.
Stability Control (ESC) for a complete expla- tain the desired path.
nation of the available ESC modes. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine WARNING!
the vehicle path intended by the driver and The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
WARNING! compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. prevent the natural laws of physics from act-
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road When the actual path does not match the ing on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
conditions and driving conditions, influence intended path, ESC applies the brake of the traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the tions. The ESC cannot prevent accidents,
occur. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) cannot oversteer or understeer condition. including those resulting from excessive
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more speed in turns, driving on very slippery sur-
those that involve leaving the roadway or than appropriate for the steering wheel po- faces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an
striking objects or other vehicles. The capa- sition. ESC-equipped vehicle must never be ex-
bilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous than appropriate for the steering wheel po- which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
manner which could jeopardize the user’s sition. safety of others.
safety or the safety of others. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster), starts The ESC system has three available operating
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and modes in 4H range. The system has one oper-
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC ating mode in 4L range. Two-wheel drive ve-
This system enhances directional control and hicles and four-wheel drive vehicles in 2H
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
stability of the vehicle under various driving range have two operating modes.
conditions. The ESC corrects for over/under flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
212

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4H Range (4WD Models) or 2WD Models All other stability features of ESC function nor-
mally. This mode is intended to be used if the WARNING!
On With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel condi-
tions and more wheel spin than ESC would vehicle stability offered by ESC and ERM are
4H and 2WD vehicles. unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneu-
normally allow is required to gain traction. To
Partial Off turn ESC on again, momentarily press the ESC ver, the ESC and ERM systems will not en-
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing OFF switch. This will restore the normal “ESC gage to assist in maintaining stability. The
the ESC OFF switch. On” mode of operation. “Full Off” ESC mode is intended for off-road
NOTE: use only.
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driv-
ing with snow chains, or starting off in deep 4L Range (4WD Models)
snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to ESC Off
switch to the “Partial Off” mode by pressing This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L
the ESC OFF switch. Once the situation range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L
requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range,
momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch. the ESC system will be in this mode. In 4L
This may be done while the vehicle is in range, ESC and TCS, except for the “limited
ESC OFF Switch motion. slip” feature described in the TCS section, are
turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of
When in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, the TCS portion of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph (64 km/h), the
ESC has been disabled and the “ESC normal ESC stability function returns but TCS
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will be remains off. When the vehicle speed drops
illuminated. below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system shuts
off. The ESC is off at low vehicle speeds in 4L
range so that it will not interfere with off-road
213

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 driving, but the ESC function returns to provide Disabling ESC For Modified Vehicles (4WD
the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph Models Only) WARNING!
(64 km/h). The “ESC Activation/Malfunction In- Vehicles modified with larger tires and/or sus- With ESC in the permanent disable mode,
dicator Light” will always be illuminated in 4L pension lifts may experience early ESC activa- enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
range when ESC is off. tions as compared to a non-modified produc- and ERM systems is unavailable. In an emer-
tion vehicle depending on lift size, tire size, gency evasive maneuver, the ESC and ERM
NOTE:
suspension changes and/or driving habits. If systems will not engage to assist in maintain-
The “ESC OFF” message will display and early ESC activations are experienced while ing stability. This disabled mode is intended
the audible chime will sound when the shift driving a modified vehicle, the additional ability
lever is placed in the PARK position from for off-highway or off-road use only. Vehicle
to permanently turn off ESC is available. A modifications requiring the owner to configure
any position other than PARK, and then steering wheel/ESC button maneuver must be
moved out of the PARK position. This will the vehicle in the ESC disabled mode, will
performed to permanently disable ESC and
occur even if the message was previously defeat the functionality of the ESC switch. Re- seriously affect the vehicle’s roadworthiness
cleared. peating the procedure will return the system to and safety and may lead to loss of control
normal ESC operation and restore ESC switch and/or accident resulting in possible serious
WARNING! functionality allowing ESC “Partial” or “Off” or fatal injuries.
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced modes.
vehicle stability offered by ESC and ERM are The following procedure will disable (or re-
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneu- enable) ESC functionality in the vehicle:
ver, the ESC and ERM systems will not en- 1. Shift the transfer case into the 4H range
gage to assist in maintaining stability. The position.
“Full Off” mode is intended for off-road use 2. Turn the steering wheel until it is centered
only. and the wheels are pointed straight ahead.
3. Cycle the ignition key OFF to ON.

214

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Wait approximately five seconds for the sys- ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator accelerator and apply as little throttle as pos-
tem bulb check. Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light sible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road conditions.
5. Turn and hold the steering wheel one-half The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
turn to the right (clockwise). Indicator Light” in the instrument NOTE:
6. Press and hold the ESC OFF button for cluster will come on when the igni- • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indica-
seven seconds. tion switch is turned to the ON tor Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator
position. It should go out with the Light” come on momentarily each time
7. Turn the steering wheel back to center, and engine running. If the “ESC the ignition switch is turned ON.
turn and hold an additional one-half turn to the Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the
left (counterclockwise). on continuously with the engine running, a ESC system will be ON even if it was
8. Press and hold the ESC OFF button for malfunction has been detected in the ESC turned off previously.
seven seconds. system. If this light remains on after several • The ESC system will make buzzing or
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
9. Turn the steering wheel back to center. clicking sounds when it is active. This is
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater normal; the sounds will stop when ESC
10. Press and hold the ESC OFF button for than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized becomes inactive following the maneuver
seven seconds. dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
that caused the ESC activation.
diagnosed and corrected.
11. Cycle the ignition key to OFF. The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” in-
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
After performing the ESC disable procedure dicates the Electronic Stability
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
correctly, “ESC OFF” will be displayed in the Control (ESC) is off.
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
odometer for approximately 12 seconds each
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
time the ignition is moved to ON. Repeating the
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC disable procedure will re-enable normal
ESC operation.
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the an excessively swaying trailer and will take the

215

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Gear Approximate HDC
The system may reduce engine power and Equipped Set Speed
apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to HDC is only intended for low speed off-road 1st 1 mph (1.5 km/h)
counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will driving. HDC maintains vehicle speed while 2nd 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
become active automatically once an exces- descending hills in off-road driving conditions
sively swaying trailer is recognized. No driver 3rd 4 mph (6.5 km/h)
by applying the brakes when necessary.
action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all 4th 5.5 mph (9 km/h)
trailers from swaying. Always use caution when The symbol indicates the status of DRIVE 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight the Hill Descent Control (HDC) fea- REVERSE 1 mph (1.5 km/h)
recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in ture. The lamp will be on solid
when HDC is armed. HDC can However, the driver can override HDC opera-
“Starting and Operating” for further information. tion by applying the brake to slow the vehicle
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/ only be armed when the transfer
case is in the “4WD LOW” position down below the HDC control speed. If more
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the en- speed is desired during HDC control, the ac-
gine power may be reduced and you may feel and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while celerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in
the brakes being applied to individual wheels the usual manner. When either the brake or the
to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC
indicator light will flash on/off. accelerator is released, HDC will control the
is disabled when the ESP system is in the vehicle at the original set speed.
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and
activates when the vehicle is descending a hill. Enabling HDC
WARNING! HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to 1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range.
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle suit the driving conditions. The speed corre- Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Start-
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and sponds to the transmission gear selected. ing and Operating” for further information.
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway. 2. Press the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill
Descent Control Indicator Light” in the instru-
ment cluster will turn on solid.

216

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: Safety replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire
If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range, rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
the “Hill Descent Control Indicator Light” WARNING! consumption.
will flash for five seconds and HDC will not • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
be enabled. can result in over-heating and tire failure. Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
Disabling HDC • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and un-
cushion shock. Objects on the road and comfortable ride.
1. Press the “Hill Descent” button or shift the
chuck holes can cause damage that results Tire Inflation Pressures
transfer case out of 4WD LOW range. The “Hill
Descent Control Indicator” light in the instru- in tire failure. Tire pressure should be checked and adjusted
ment cluster will turn off. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or
problems. You could lose control of your visible damage, at least once a month. Use a
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION vehicle. good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can af- pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the fect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, when determining proper inflation. Radial tires
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. resulting in loss of vehicle control. may look properly inflated even when they are
Three primary areas are affected by improper • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the under-inflated.
tire pressure: vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left. CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
Economy always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. valve stem, which could damage the Tire
These abnormal wear patterns will reduce Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire

217

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Inflation pressures specified on the placard are Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13
always “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce WARNING!
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure this normal pressure buildup or your tire pres- High speed driving with your vehicle under
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least sure will be too low. load is dangerous. The added strain on your
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) tires could cause them to fail. You could have
after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation
Tire Pressures For High-Speed a serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle
pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- Operation loaded to maximum capacity at continuous
tion pressure molded into the tire side wall. The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
speeds within posted speed limits. Where
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a speed limits or conditions are such that the
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain- Radial-Ply Tires
pressures vary with temperature changes. ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced ve- WARNING!
(7 kPa) per 12° F (7° C) of air temperature hicle loading may be required for high-speed Combining radial ply tires with other types of
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
pressure inside a garage, especially in the or an authorized tire dealer for recommended handle poorly. The instability could cause an
Winter. safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire accident. Always use radial tires in sets of
inflation pressures. four. Never combine them with other types of
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C)
and the outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then tires.
the cold tire inflation pressure should be in-
creased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable
(7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this outside only in the tread area because of sidewall
temperature condition. flexing. Consult your authorized dealer for ra-
dial tire repairs.

218

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire Spinning
WARNING!
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
tions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h). after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
WARNING! in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces and have an accident resulting in serious
generated by excessive wheel speeds may injury or death.
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) 1 — Worn Tire
tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone 2 — New Tire
near a spinning wheel no matter what the Replacement Tires
These indicators are molded into the bottom of The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
speed.
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands of many characteristics. They should be in-
when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). spected regularly for wear and correct cold tire
Tread Wear Indicators When the tread is worn to the tread wear inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly
Tread wear indicators are in the original equip- indicators, the tire should be replaced. recommends that you use tires equivalent to
ment tires to help you in determining when your
Life Of Tire the originals in size, quality and performance
tires should be replaced.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon when replacement is needed (see the para-
varying factors including but not limited to: graph on tread wear indicators). Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard for the
• Driving style size designation of your tire. The service de-
• Tire pressure scription and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
• Distance driven equivalent replacement tires may adversely
219

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 affect the safety, handling, and ride of your These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
vehicle. We recommend that you refer to your WARNING! (Continued) of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
original equipment or contact an authorized tire • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
dealer with any questions you may have on tire capacity, other than what was originally as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
specifications or capability. equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
a smaller load index could result in tire and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
WARNING! overloading and failure. You could lose smooth, quiet ride.
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other control and have an accident. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
than that specified for your vehicle. Some • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires proper maintenance intervals. More frequent
combinations of unapproved tires and having adequate speed capability can re- rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons
wheels may change suspension dimen- sult in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle for any rapid or unusual wear should be cor-
sions and performance characteristics, re- control. rected prior to rotation being performed.
sulting in changes to steering, handling, The suggested rotation method is the “forward-
and braking of your vehicle. This can cause CAUTION! cross” shown in the following diagram.
unpredictable handling and stress to steer- Replacing original tires with tires of a different
ing and suspension components. You could size may result in false speedometer and
lose control and have an accident resulting odometer readings.
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved TIRE ROTATION
for your vehicle. RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
(Continued)
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
Tire Rotation
220

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM including low temperature effects, or natural ing Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may
(TPMS) pressure loss through the tire. cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Moni-
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based tire pressure as long as the condition exists, toring Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this
on the vehicle recommended cold placard and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
pressure. Light” will turn OFF only after the tires have
above recommended cold placard pressure.
been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by Once the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” has been illuminated, the tire pressure cold placard pressure value.
about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature must be increased to the recommended cold
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure CAUTION!
pressure should always be set based on cold Monitoring Telltale Light” to be turned OFF. The • The TPMS has been optimized for the
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire system will automatically update and the “Tire original equipment tires and wheels. The
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extin- TPMS pressures have been established for
more than three hours, or driven less than guish once the updated tire pressures have the tire size equipped on your vehicle.
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. Refer been received. The vehicle may need to be Undesirable system operation or sensor
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph damage may result when using replace-
and Operating” for information on how to (24 km/h) to receive this information.
ment equipment that is not of the same
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire For example, your vehicle may have a recom- size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is mended cold (parked for more than three can cause sensor damage. Do not use
driven; this is normal and there should be no hours) air pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the
adjustment for this increased pressure. aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease damage to the sensors may result.
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low
pressure warning threshold for any reason, the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (Continued)
(179 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
221

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 reached the level to trigger illumination of A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in
CAUTION! (Continued) the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- Light.” a matching full size spare wheel and tire as-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. sembly. The matching full size spare tire can be
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect
This will prevent moisture and dirt from tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor used in place of any of the four road tires. A low
entering the valve stem, which could dam- the actual tire pressure in the tire. spare tire will not cause the “Tire Pressure
age the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the
Base System chime to sound.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
• The TPMS is not intended to replace nor- Light” will illuminate in the instrument
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
mal tire care and maintenance, nor to cluster, a “LOW TIRE” message will be
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of
provide warning of a tire failure or condi- displayed for a minimum of five sec-
the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings
tion. onds and an audible chime will be activated
to the Receiver Module.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire when one or more of the four active road tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire NOTE: pressures are low. Should this occur, you
pressure. It is particularly important for you to check should stop as soon as possible, check the
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
tire causes the tire to overheat and can and to maintain the proper pressure. and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom-
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also mended cold placard pressure value. The sys-
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) con-
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, tem will automatically update and the “Tire
sists of the following components:
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and “LOW
stopping ability. • Receiver Module TIRE” message will extinguish once the up-
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors dated tire pressures have been received. The
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 min-
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light utes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
responsibility to maintain correct tire
information.
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
222

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will bly, it has a tire pressure monitoring sen- upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime
flash on and off for 75 seconds, and will remain sor, and can be monitored by the Tire will sound and the “Tire Pressure Moni-
on solid when a system fault is detected. The Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In toring Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE”
system fault will also sound a chime. If the the event that the matching full size spare message will turn ON. After driving the
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, tire is swapped with a low pressure road vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
providing the system fault still exists. A system tire, the next ignition key cycle will still (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
fault can occur by any of the following sce- show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
narios: tale Light” to be ON, a “LOW TIRE” mes- 75 seconds and then remain on solid. For
sage displayed for a minimum of five each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driv-
seconds and a chime to sound. Driving chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure
ing next to facilities emitting the same Radio
Frequencies as the TPM sensors. the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on
15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and solid. Once you repair or replace the origi-
tinting that affects radio wave signals. “LOW TIRE” message as long as none of nal road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or the road tires are below the low pressure in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will
wheel housings. warning threshold. update automatically and the “Tire Pres-
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a sure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
matching full size spare wheel and tire
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM assembly, it does not have a tire pressure the low-pressure warning limit in any of
sensors. monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The the four active road tires. The vehicle may
TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
NOTE: above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
pressure. If you install the spare tire in
• If your vehicle is equipped with a match- place of a road tire that has a pressure TPMS to receive this information.
ing full size spare wheel and tire assem- below the low-pressure warning limit,

223

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — turer recommends the use of gasoline that Ethanol
GASOLINE ENGINES meets the WWFC specifications if they are The manufacturer recommends that your ve-
This engine is designed to meet all emissions available. hicle be operated on fuel containing no more
regulations and provide excellent fuel economy Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such than 10% ethanol. Purchasing your fuel from a
and performance when using high quality un- as hard starting, stalling and stumble. If you reputable supplier may reduce the risk of ex-
leaded gasoline with a minimum research oc- experience these problems, try another brand ceeding this 10% limit and/or of receiving fuel
tane rating of 91. The use of premium gasoline of gasoline before considering service for the with abnormal properties. It should also be
is not recommended, as it will not provide any vehicle. noted that an increase in fuel consumption
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines. should be expected when using ethanol-
Methanol blended fuels, due to the lower energy content
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not (Methyl or Wood Alcohol) is used in a variety of of ethanol.
harmful to your engine. However, continued concentrations when blended with unleaded
heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause gasoline. You may find fuels containing 3% or Problems that result from using methanol/
damage, and immediate service is required. more methanol along with other alcohols called gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such cosolvents. Problems that result from using responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you methanol/gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does
experience these symptoms, try another brand not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While not have the negative effects of Methanol.
of gasoline before considering service for the MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
vehicle. does not have the negative effects of Methanol. CAUTION!
Over 40 auto manufacturer’s worldwide have Use of fuel with ethanol content higher than
issued and endorsed consistent gasoline CAUTION! 10% may result in engine malfunction, starting
specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or and operating difficulties and materials degra-
WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary E85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result dation. These adverse effects could result in
to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, in starting and driveability problems and may permanent damage to your vehicle.
and durability for your vehicle. The manufac-
damage critical fuel system components.

224

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Clean Air Gasoline Materials Added to Fuel
WARNING! (Continued)
Many gasolines are now being blended that Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
contribute to cleaner air, especially in those proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
areas where air pollution levels are high. These detergents, corrosion and stability additives carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
new blends provide a cleaner burning fuel and are recommended. Using gasolines that have gas which can kill. Never run the engine in
some are referred to as “reformulated gaso- these additives will help improve fuel economy, a closed area, such as a garage, and never
line.” reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor- sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
The manufacturer supports these efforts toward mance. running for an extended period. If the ve-
cleaner air. You can help by using these blends Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning hicle is stopped in an open area with the
as they become available. agents should be avoided. Many of these ma- engine running for more than a short pe-
terials intended for gum and varnish removal riod, adjust the ventilation system to force
MMT in Gasoline may contain active solvents or similar ingredi- fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
MMT is a manganese containing metallic addi-
ents. These can harm fuel system gasket and • Guard against carbon monoxide with
tive that is blended into some gasoline to
diaphragm materials. proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond system inspected every time the vehicle is
gasoline of the same octane number without WARNING! raised. Have any abnormal conditions re-
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is paired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
spark plug life and reduces emission system deadly. Follow the precautions below to pre- all side windows fully open.
performance in some vehicles. The manufac- vent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Keep the swing gate closed when driving
turer recommends that gasoline without MMT your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide
be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of (Continued)
and other poisonous exhaust gases from
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline entering the vehicle.
pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains
MMT.

225

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — DIESEL 1. Turn off engine.
WARNING!
ENGINES 2. Insert the ignition key into the fuel cap and • Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap (gas
Use Premium Quality Diesel fuels with a Cetane turn the key one-quarter turn to the right, then cap) slowly to prevent fuel spray from the
rating of 50 or higher, and meeting the EN590 rotate the fuel cap to the left to remove.
standard are highly recommended. See your filler neck, which may cause injury.
authorized dealer for further information re- 3. Rotate the ignition key back to the left to • The volatility of some gasolines may cause
garding fuels available in your area. remove. a buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that
4. To replace the cap, insert it into the filler may increase while you drive. This pres-
ADDING FUEL neck and tighten to the right until at least three sure can result in a spray of gasoline and/or
Locking Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) clicks are heard. vapors when the cap is removed from a hot
The locking gas cap is located on the driver’s vehicle. Removing the cap slowly allows
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or CAUTION! the pressure to vent and prevents fuel
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the • Damage to the fuel system or emissions spray.
correct one for this vehicle. control system could result from using an • Never have any smoking materials lit in or
improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). near the vehicle when the gas cap is re-
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities moved or the tank is being filled.
into the fuel system. • Never add fuel to the vehicle when the
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the engine is running.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not a portable container that is inside of a
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank gas containers on the ground while filling.
is full.

Fuel Filler Cap

226

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: TRAILER TOWING Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a In this section, you will find safety tips and The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
“clicking” sound. This is an indication information on limits to the type of towing you weight of all cargo, consumables and equip-
that the gas cap is tightened properly. The can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before ment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on
MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on towing a trailer, carefully review this information the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙
if the gas cap is not secured properly. to tow your load as efficiently and safely as condition. The recommended way to measure
Make sure that the gas cap is tightened possible. GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
each time the vehicle is refueled. vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the re- must be supported by the scale.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, quirements and recommendations in this
the fuel tank is full. manual concerning vehicles used for trailer Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
towing. The GCWR is the total permissible weight of
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message (gASCAP)
your vehicle and trailer when weighed in com-
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnos- Common Towing Definitions bination.
tic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is The following trailer towing related definitions
possibly loose, improperly installed, or dam- will assist you in understanding the following NOTE:
aged. If the system detects a malfunction, the information: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
“gASCAP” message will display in the odom- allowance for the presence of a driver.
eter display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙click- Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
ing⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
odometer reset button to turn the message off. cargo and tongue weight. The total load must and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
If the problem persists, the message will ap- be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
pear the next time the vehicle is started. This not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem
is detected twice in a row, the system will turn
on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Re-
solving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
227

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 With Attachment Point
WARNING! WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the An improperly adjusted hitch system may • For detachable tow bar, pass the cable
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous reduce handling, stability and braking perfor- through the attachment point and clip it back
driving condition can result if either rating is mance and could result in an accident. Con- onto itself.
exceeded. You could lose control of the ve- sult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or
hicle and have an accident. a reputable trailer/caravan dealer for addi-
tional information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force ex- Frontal Area
erted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most The frontal area is the maximum height multi-
cases, it should not be less than 7% or more plied by the maximum width of the front of a
than 10% of the trailer load. Tongue weight trailer.
must not exceed the lesser of either the hitch
certification rating, or the trailer tongue chassis Breakaway Cable Attachment
rating. It should never be less than 4% of the European braking regulations for braked trail-
ers up to 7,700 lbs (3 500 kg) require trailers to Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method
trailer load, and not less than 55 lbs (25 kg).
You must consider tongue load as part of the be fitted with either a secondary coupling or
load on your vehicle and its GAWR. breakaway cable.
The recommended location for attaching the
normal trailer’s breakaway cable is in the
stamped slot located on the sidewall of the
hitch receiver.

228

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • For fixed ball tow bar, attach the clip directly Without Attachment Points • For fixed ball tow bar, loop the cable around
to the designated point. This alternative must • For detachable ball tow bar, you must follow the neck of the tow ball. If you fit the cable
be specifically permitted by the trailer manu- the recommended manufacturer or supplier like this, use a single loop only.
facturer since the clip may not be sufficiently procedure.
strong for use in this way.

Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method

Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method
Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method

229

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Model Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)
All Two-Door 4,409 lbs (2 000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg)
All Four-Door 7,716 lbs (3 500 kg) 308 lbs (140 kg)
Maximum trailer towing speed is limited to 62 mph (100 km/h) unless local laws require a lower speed.
NOTE: Consider the following items when computing Towing Requirements
The trailer tongue weight must be consid- the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
ered as part of the combined weight of • The tongue weight of the trailer. drivetrain components, the following guidelines
occupants and cargo, and should never ex- are recommended:
ceed the weight referenced on the Tire and • The weight of any other type of cargo or
Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires equipment put in or on your vehicle.
CAUTION!
– General Information” in “Starting and Op- • The weight of the driver and all passengers. • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
erating” for further information. 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
NOTE:
Trailer And Tongue Weight Remember that everything put into or on the driven. The engine, axle or other parts
Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, could be damaged.
the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely additional factory-installed options, or • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
side to side which will cause loss of control of dealer-installed options, must be consid- that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers ered as part of the total load on your vehicle. 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer Refer to the Tire and Loading Information full throttle. This helps the engine and other
accidents. placard, located on the drivers door pillar, parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight for the maximum combined weight of occu- loads.
stamped on your trailer hitch. pants and cargo for your vehicle.

230

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Towing Requirements – Tires
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)
Improper towing can lead to an injury acci- • Safety chains must always be used be- − Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
dent. Follow these guidelines to make your tween your vehicle and trailer. Always con- compact spare tire.
trailer towing as safe as possible: nect the chains to the frame or hook retain- − Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
• Make certain that the load is secured in the ers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains for the safe and satisfactory operation of
trailer and will not shift during travel. When under the trailer tongue and allow enough your vehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Infor-
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, slack for turning corners. mation” in “Starting and Operating” for
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked proper tire inflation procedures.
difficult for the driver to control. You could on a grade. When parking, apply the park- − Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
lose control of your vehicle and have an ing brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow pressures before trailer usage.
accident. vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. − Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
• All trailer hitches should be professionally Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels. damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
installed on your vehicle. • GCWR must not be exceeded. “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do • Total weight must be distributed be- Operating” for the proper inspection proce-
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over- tween the tow vehicle and the trailer dure.
loading can cause a loss of control, poor such that the following four ratings are − When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – Gen-
performance or damage to the brakes, not exceeded: eral Information” in “Starting and Operating”
axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus- 1. GVWR for proper tire replacement procedures. Re-
pension, chassis structure or tires. 2. GTW placing tires with a higher load carrying
3. GAWR capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
(Continued) 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch GVWR and GAWR limits.
utilized.

231

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
WARNING! The DRIVE range can be selected when tow-
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake sys- • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehi- ing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in
tem or vacuum system of your vehicle with cle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload this range, the “O/D OFF” mode should be
that of the trailer. This could cause inad- your brake system and cause it to fail. You selected.
equate braking and possible personal injury.
might not have brakes when you need
NOTE:
− When towing a trailer equipped with a hy- them and could have an accident.
draulic surge actuated brake system, an • Towing any trailer will increase your stop- Using the “O/D OFF” mode while operating
electronic brake controller is not required. the vehicle under heavy operating condi-
ping distance. When towing, you should
tions will improve performance and extend
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers allow for additional space between your transmission life by reducing excessive
over 1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. shifting and heat build up. This action will
trailers in excess of 1,653 lbs (750 kg). Failure to do so could result in an accident. also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter
CAUTION! Towing Tips should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous
(450 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes stopping and backing the trailer in an area operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for
and they should be of adequate capacity. away from heavy traffic. transmission fluid change intervals.
Failure to do this could lead to accelerated Manual Transmission – If Equipped NOTE:
brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer
and longer stopping distances. towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid Check the automatic transmission fluid level
excessive clutch slippage. before towing.
O/D Off – If Equipped
To reduce the potential for automatic transmis-
sion overheating, select “O/D OFF” when driv-
ing in hilly areas or shift the transmission to

232

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DRIVE position 2 on more severe grades. Refer − Air Conditioning Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points And
to “Automatic Transmission” in “Starting and Turn off temporarily. Overhang Dimensions
Operating” for further information. A N/A
Trailer Hitch Attaching Points
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped Your vehicle will require extra equipment to tow B N/A
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. a trailer safely and efficiently. The trailer tow C N/A
hitch must be attached to your vehicle using D (maximum over- 2.47 ft. (754 mm)
− When using the speed control, if you expe- the provided attaching points on the vehicle’s hang)
rience speed drops greater than 10 mph frame. Refer to the following chart to determine E 3.39 ft. (1032 mm)
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back the accurate attaching points. Other equip-
to cruising speed. F 0.16 ft. (50 mm)
ment, such as trailer sway controls and braking
G 0.46 ft. (140 mm)
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light equipment, trailer equalizing (leveling) equip-
loads to maximize fuel efficiency. ment and low profile mirrors, may also be
required or strongly recommended.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase
engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.

233

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
• Automatic transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE • Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL (N)
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)
Drive Models • Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. • Automatic transmissions must be placed in
NOTE: Internal damage to the transmission or the PARK position for recreational towing.
The transfer case must be shifted into N transfer case will occur if a front or rear • Manual transmissions must be placed in
(Neutral), automatic transmission must be wheel lift is used when recreational towing. gear (not in Neutral) for recreational towing.
shifted into PARK, and manual transmission • Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
must be placed in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) (Continued)
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
for recreational towing. damage to the transfer case.
(Continued)

234

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Shift the automatic transmission into NEU-
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! TRAL or depress the clutch pedal on a manual
• Before recreational towing, perform the You or others could be injured if you leave the transmission.
procedure outlined under “Shifting Into vehicle unattended with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL” to be certain that the transfer the N (Neutral) position without first fully en- 5. Shift the transfer case lever into N (Neutral).
case is fully in NEUTRAL. Otherwise, inter- gaging the parking brake. The transfer case N 6. Start the engine.
nal damage will result. (Neutral) position disengages both the front 7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and
requirements can cause severe transmis- 8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal
will allow the vehicle to move, even if the
on manual transmissions) for five seconds and
sion and/or transfer case damage. Damage transmission is in PARK. The parking brake ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
from improper towing is not covered under should always be applied when the driver is
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. not in the vehicle. 9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic trans-
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on mission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face gear.
CAUTION!
bar will be damaged. 10. Turn OFF the engine and leave the ignition
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
switch in the unlocked OFF position.
certain that the transfer case is fully in N
Shifting Into Neutral (N) 11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Use the following procedure to prepare your (Neutral) before recreational towing to prevent
vehicle for recreational towing. damage to internal parts. 12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place
manual transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral).
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.

235

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Turn the ignition key/fob to the LOCK/OFF 15. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
CAUTION! position (if it has been moved or the engine has brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
Damage to the transmission may occur if the been started). transmissions), and check that the vehicle op-
transmission is shifted into PARK with the erates normally.
transfer case in N (Neutral) and the engine 5. Turn the ignition key/fob to the ON/RUN
position, but do not start the engine.
running. With the transfer case in N (Neutral)
ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting 6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
the transmission into PARK. 7. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using 8. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired
a suitable tow bar. position.
14. Release the parking brake. NOTE:
15. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and When shifting out of transfer case N (Neu-
secure it away from the negative battery post. tral), turning the engine OFF may be re-
quired to avoid gear clash.
Shifting Out of Neutral (N) 9. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,
Use the following procedure to prepare your or place manual transmission in Neutral.
vehicle for normal usage.
10. Release the brake pedal.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle. 11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 12. Start the engine.
3. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.

236

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• HAZARD WARNING FLASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
• IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
• JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
• Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
• Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
• Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
• Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
• JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
• Preparations for Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
• Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
• TOW EYES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
• SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
• TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
• Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
• Four–Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

237

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER NOTE: NOTE:
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located With extended use the Hazard Warning There are steps that you can take to slow
on the instrument panel below the climate flasher may wear down your battery. down an impending overheat condition:
controls. • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS off. The A/C system adds heat to the
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard In any of the following situations, you can
Warning flasher. When the switch is engine cooling system and turning the
reduce the potential for overheating by taking A/C off can help remove this heat.
activated, all directional turn signals will the appropriate action.
flash on and off to warn oncoming • You can also turn the temperature control
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a • On the highways — slow down. to maximum heat, the mode control to
second time to turn off the Hazard Warning • In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmis- floor and the blower control to high. This
flasher. sion into NEUTRAL, but do not increase allows the heater core to act as a supple-
This is an emergency warning system and it engine idle speed. ment to the radiator and aids in removing
should not be used when the vehicle is in heat from the engine cooling system.
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled CAUTION!
and it is creating a safety hazard for other Driving with a hot cooling system could dam- WARNING!
motorists. age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge You or others can be badly burned by hot
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis- reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
tance, the Hazard Warning flasher will continue Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
to operate even though the ignition is placed in off until the pointer drops back into the normal from under the hood, do not open the hood
the OFF position. range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine try to open a cooling system pressure cap
off immediately, and call for service. when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

238

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location NOTE:
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear If you have added aftermarket accessories
WARNING! storage compartment. to the spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side exceed a gross weight of 50 lbs (23 kg)
of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far including the weight of the spare tire.
enough off the road to avoid the danger of Preparations For Jacking
being hit when operating the jack or chang-
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
ing the wheel. slippery areas.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is danger-
ous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and
WARNING!
fall on you. You could be crushed. Never Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
put any part of your body under a vehicle the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far
that is on a jack. enough off the road to avoid being hit when
• Never start or run the engine while the Jack Storage operating the jack or changing the wheel.
vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under
a raised vehicle, take it to a service center Spare Tire Stowage 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
where it can be raised on a lift. To remove the spare tire from the carrier, re-
move the tire cover, if equipped, and remove 3. Set the parking brake.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them 4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,
counterclockwise. or a manual transmission into REVERSE.
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level 5. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

239

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6. Block both the front
and rear of the wheel WARNING! (Continued)
diagonally opposite of • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
the jacking position. For wheel to be raised.
example, if changing • Set the parking brake firmly and set an
the right front tire, block automatic transmission in PARK; a manual Jack Warning Label
the left rear wheel. transmission in REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the CAUTION!
vehicle on a jack. Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it on locations other than those indicated in the
NOTE: is on a jack. Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
when the vehicle is being jacked. jack. 1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from
Jacking Instructions • Only use the jack in the positions indicated the stored location.
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire 2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
WARNING! change. nuts by turning them to the left one turn while
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings • If working on or near a roadway, be ex- the wheel is still on the ground.
to help prevent personal injury or damage to tremely careful of motor traffic.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Con-
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
your vehicle: nect the jack handle driver to the extension,
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far are securely stowed, spares must be then to the lug wrench.
from the edge of the roadway as possible stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground. 4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of
before raising the vehicle. the vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube,
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. as shown. Do not raise the vehicle until you
(Continued) are sure the jack is fully engaged.

240

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 tightened twice. The correct wheel nut tight-
WARNING! ness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt about the
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can correct tightness, have them checked with a
make the vehicle less stable and cause a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
collision. It could slip off the jack and hurt service station.
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only
10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel
enough to remove the tire. blocks.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel. 11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle proper locations.
and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped 12. Remove blocks from wheels.
Jacking Locations
end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
1 — Rear Jacking Lo- 2 — Front Jacking Lo- nuts clockwise.
cation cation WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw WARNING! collision or hard stop, could endanger the
to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the tire To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
just clears the surface and enough clearance is jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until parts and the spare tire in the places provided.
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire the vehicle has been lowered.
lift provides maximum stability.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw CAUTION!
to the left, and remove the jack. Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on locations other than those indicated in the
the wrench while tightening for increased lever- Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
age. Alternate nuts until each nut has been

241

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES Preparations for Jump-Start
WARNING! (Continued)
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can The battery in your vehicle is located in the right
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch
be jump-started using a set of jumper cables rear of the engine compartment, behind the
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a Power Distribution Center. bands or bracelets that might make an
portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
can be dangerous if done improperly so please seriously injured.
follow the procedures in this section carefully. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen
NOTE:
gas which is flammable and explosive.
When using a portable battery booster pack
Keep open flames or sparks away from the
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions. battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic
CAUTION! transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or LOCK.
any other booster source with a system volt- Positive Battery Post
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unneces-
age greater than 12 Volts or damage to the sary electrical accessories.
battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan 3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the
system may occur.
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
cables reach, set the parking brake and make
WARNING! anytime the ignition switch is on. You can sure the ignition is OFF.
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is be injured by moving fan blades.
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause (Continued)
personal injury.

242

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the
WARNING! cable to the negative (-) post of the booster jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as battery. booster battery.
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) 8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
jumper cable to a good engine ground (ex- (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
posed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s the booster battery.
Jump-Starting Procedure engine) away from the battery and the fuel
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
injection system.
WARNING! jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
Failure to follow this procedure could result in discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
personal injury or property damage due to Do not connect the cable to the negative post If frequent jump-starting is required to start your
battery explosion. (-) of the discharged battery. The resulting vehicle you should have the battery and charg-
electrical spark could cause the battery to ing system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION! explode and could result in personal injury.
Failure to follow these procedures could result CAUTION!
in damage to the charging system of the 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the Accessories that can be plugged into the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few min- vehicle power outlets draw power from the
booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
utes, and then start the engine in the vehicle vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper with the discharged battery.
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in
cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged Once the engine is started, remove the jumper long enough, the vehicle’s battery will dis-
vehicle. cables in the reverse sequence: charge sufficiently to degrade battery life
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable and/or prevent the engine from starting.
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the from the engine ground of the vehicle with the
booster battery. discharged battery.

243

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TOW EYES SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
Your vehicle is equipped with tow eyes, which If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever brake pedal.
are mounted in the front and the rear. cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you 5. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, reach
can use the following procedure to temporarily into the opening and press and hold the shift
CAUTION! move the shift lever: lever override.
Tow eyes are for emergency use only, to 1. Firmly set the parking brake. 6. Move the shift lever into NEUTRAL.
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use
2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEU-
tow eyes for tow truck hookup or highway without starting the engine.
towing. You could damage your vehicle. Tow TRAL.
straps are recommended when towing the 3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully 8. Reinstall the shift lever override access
remove the shift lever override access cover, is cover.
vehicle; chains may cause vehicle damage.
located on the PRNDL bezel.

WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
eyes. Tow straps and chains may break, caus-
ing serious injury.

Shift Lever Override Access Cover

244

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground 4WD MODELS
See instructions under “Recreational Towing”
• Auto Trans in PARK
Flat Tow NONE • Manual Trans in gear ( NOT in Neutral)
• T/case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
Front NO
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Rear NO
Flat Bed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow “Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Over- CAUTION!
bars and other equipment designed for the ride” under “Automatic Transmission” in the • Do not attempt to use sling type equipment
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s “Starting and Operating” section for instruc- when towing. When securing the vehicle to
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. tions on shifting the automatic transmission out a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main of the PARK position for towing suspension components. Damage to your
structural members of the vehicle, not to bum- vehicle may result from improper towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, de-
pers or associated brackets. State and local frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition • If the vehicle being towed requires steering.
laws applying to vehicles under tow must be the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC
observed. or ACC position, not the LOCK position.
position.

245

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Towing Without The Ignition Key
CAUTION!
Fob • Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is
Internal damage to the transmission or
towed with the ignition in the LOCK position.
The only approved method of towing without transfer case will occur if a front or rear
the ignition key is with a flatbed truck. Proper wheel lift is used when towing.
towing equipment is necessary to prevent • Failure to follow these towing methods
damage to the vehicle. could result in damage to the transmission
and/or transfer case. Such damage is not
Four–Wheel Drive Models
covered by the New Vehicle Limited War-
The manufacturer recommends towing with all
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods ranty.
are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one
end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on
a towing dolly
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK (for
automatic transmissions) or in gear ( NOT in
Neutral, for manual transmissions). Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operat-
ing” for detailed instructions

246

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.8L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
• ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 2.8L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
• ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . . . . . . . . . 251
• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
• REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
• MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
• Engine Oil – Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
• Engine Oil – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
• Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
• Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
• Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
• Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
• Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
• Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
• Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
• Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

247

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
• Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
• Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 262
• Hydraulic Clutch Fluid – Manual Transmission . . . . . . . 263
• Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
• Transfer Case – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
• Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
• Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion . . . . . 264
• FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
• Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
• VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
• REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
• FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
• FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . 274
• Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
• Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

248

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.8L

1 — Integrated Power Module 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

2 — Battery 8 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 9 — Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

249

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 2.8L DIESEL

1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

2 — Battery 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 10 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

250

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — is detected twice in a row, the system will turn
CAUTION! on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
OBD II • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated MIL off.
cause further damage to the emission con-
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the emis- trol system. It could also affect fuel REPLACEMENT PARTS
economy and drivability. The vehicle must Use of genuine MOPAR姞 parts for normal/
sions, engine, and automatic transmission con-
be serviced before any emissions tests can scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly
trol systems. When these systems are operat-
be performed. recommended to ensure the designed perfor-
ing properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is mance. Damage or failures caused by the use
performance and fuel economy, as well as
of non-MOPAR姞 parts for maintenance and
engine emissions well within current govern- running, severe catalytic converter damage
repairs will not be covered by the manufactur-
ment regulations. and power loss will soon occur. Immediate er’s warranty.
If any of these systems require service, the service is required.
OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Indicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnos- Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message The pages that follow contain the required
tic codes and other information to assist your After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic sys- maintenance services determined by the engi-
service technician in making repairs. Although tem can determine if the fuel filler cap is neers who designed your vehicle.
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not possibly loose, improperly installed, or dam- Besides those maintenance items specified in
need towing, see your authorized dealer for aged. A “gASCAP” message will be displayed the fixed maintenance schedule, there are
service as soon as possible. in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a other components which may require servicing
⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication or replacement in the future.
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press
the odometer reset button to turn the message
off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem

251

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Oil – Gasoline Engine NOTE:
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or Checking Oil Level Under no circumstances should oil change
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s intervals exceed 7,500 miles (12 000 km) or
perform repairs and service when neces-
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at six months whichever comes first.
sary could result in more costly repairs,
damage to other components or negatively the correct level. The best time to check the Engine Oil Selection – Non ACEA
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully Categories
impact vehicle performance. Immediately
warmed up engine is shut off or before starting For best performance and maximum protection
have potential malfunctions examined by the engine after it has sat overnight. under all types of operating conditions, the
an authorized dealership or qualified repair manufacturer only recommends engine oils
center. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level that are API certified and meet the require-
• Your vehicle has been built with improved ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
readings. Always maintain the oil level within
fluids that protect the performance and
the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
durability of your vehicle and also allow quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of Oil Identification Symbol
extended maintenance intervals. Do not the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top
use chemical flushes in these components This symbol
of the safe zone on these engines.
as the chemicals can damage your engine, means that the oil
has been certified
transmission, power steering or air condi- CAUTION! by the American
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will Petroleum Institute
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This (API). The manu-
needed because of component malfunc- could damage your engine. facturer only rec-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the ommends API
flushing procedure. Change Engine Oil Certified engine
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the oils.
proper maintenance intervals.

252

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: 1 U.S. Quart (0.95 L) of oil when the reading is
CAUTION! at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to MB
229.31 or MB 229.51 may be used when SAE these engines.
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
5W-20 engine oil is not available. Engine Oil Selection – 2.8L Diesel Engine
Such damage is not covered by the New
Engine Oil – Diesel Engine Use only Diesel Engine Oils conforming to API
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(American Petroleum Institute) Quality CJ-4 or
Checking Oil Level CI-4. For countries that use the ACEA European
Engine Oil Selection – ACEA Categories To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine
For countries that use the ACEA European Oil oil must be maintained at the correct level. oils that meet the requirements of ACEA C3.
Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
that meet the requirements of ACEA C3, and every fuel stop. Engine Oil Viscosity – 2.8L Diesel Engine
that are approved to MB 229.31 or MB 229.51. For vehicles equipped with a Diesel Particulate
For vehicles equipped with a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), 5W-30 ESP fully synthetic, low ash
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.8L Engine Filter (DPF), it is acceptable to have an oil level oil that meets Chrysler Material Standard MS-
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all up to 3/8 inch (10 mm) above the MAX line. 11106 must be used.
operating temperatures. This engine oil im- Beyond 3/8 inch (10 mm) it is recommended to
proves low temperature starting and vehicle change the oil. For vehicles that are not equipped with a Diesel
fuel economy. Particulate Filter (DPF), 0W-40 ESP fully syn-
The best time to check the engine oil level is thetic oil that meets Chrysler Material Standard
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom- about five minutes after a fully warmed engine MS-10725 may be used.
mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. is shut off or before starting the engine after it
For information on engine oil filler cap location, has sat overnight. Synthetic Engine Oils
refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
Your Vehicle” for further information. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level recommended oil quality requirements are met,
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level and the recommended maintenance intervals
readings. Maintain the oil level between the for oil and filter changes are followed.
MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick. Adding

253

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Materials Added to Engine Oils cient service. MOPAR姞 engine oil filters are Maintenance-Free Battery
Do not add any supplemental materials, other high quality oil filters and are recommended. Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-
than leak detection dyes, to the engine oil. free battery. You will never have to add water,
Engine oil is an engineered product and its
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the nor is periodic maintenance required.
performance may be impaired by supplemen-
proper maintenance intervals.
tal additives. WARNING!
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
Filters The air cleaner can provide protection in the ries contain lead and lead compounds. Al-
Care should be taken in disposing of used ways wash hands after handling the battery.
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, cleaner unless it is necessary for repair or
can present a problem to the environment. maintenance. Make sure that no one is near CAUTION!
Contact your authorized dealer, service station, the engine compartment before starting the It is essential when replacing the cables on
or governmental agency for advice on how and vehicle with the air cleaner removed. Failure the battery that the positive cable is attached
where used oil and oil filters can be safely to do so can result in serious personal injury. to the positive post and the negative cable is
discarded in your area. attached to the negative post. Battery posts
Engine Oil Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection are marked (+) positive and negative (-) and
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner are identified on the battery case. Also, if a
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
filters varies considerably. Only high quality “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
new filter at every engine oil change.
filters should be used to assure most efficient the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
Engine Oil Filter Selection service. MOPAR姞 engine air cleaner filters are
All of the manufacturer’s engines have a full- cables before connecting the charger to the
a high quality filter and are recommended.
flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
type for replacement. The quality of replace- starting voltage.
ment filters varies considerably. Only high qual-
ity filters should be used to assure most effi-

254

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Air Conditioner Maintenance facturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
WARNING! vice be performed by authorized dealers or
For best possible performance, your air condi-
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri- other service facilities using recovery and recy-
tioner should be checked and serviced by an
authorized dealer at the start of each warm cants approved by the manufacturer for cling equipment.
season. This service should include cleaning of your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can Body Lubrication
the condenser fins and a performance test. Locks and all body pivot points, including such
Drive belt tension should also be checked at explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
this time. refrigerants or lubricants can cause the and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically
CAUTION! • The air conditioning system contains refrig- with a lithium-based grease, such as MOPAR姞
Do not use chemical flushes in your air con- erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
ditioning system as the chemicals can dam- personal injury or damage to the system, quiet, easy operation and to protect against
age your air conditioning components. Such adding refrigerant or any repair requiring rust and wear. Prior to the application of any
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle lines to be disconnected should be done by lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
Limited Warranty. an experienced repairman. clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed.
NOTE: Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper
Use only manufacturer approved A/C Sys-
function. When performing other underhood
tem Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Con-
services, the hood latch, release mechanism
ditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubri-
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling cated.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
The external lock cylinders should be lubri-
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the
cated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and is
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
an ozone-saving product. However, the manu-

255

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 lubricant, such as MOPAR姞 Lock Cylinder Lu- blades with humid cloth removing any de- Exhaust System
bricant or equivalent, directly into the lock bris that may be affecting its function. The best protection against carbon monoxide
cylinder. entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
Adding Washer Fluid
Windshield Wiper Blades The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers tained engine exhaust system.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the rear window washer (if equipped) is If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
and the windshield periodically with a sponge shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
or soft cloth and a mild non-abrasive cleaner. engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
This will remove accumulations of salt or road level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized tech-
film. windshield washer solvent only (not radiator nician inspect the complete exhaust system and
antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid res- adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, dete-
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper ervoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a riorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades; loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to
blades. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry this will help blade performance. seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle
windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep system in cold weather, select a solution or
required.
the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers. CAUTION!
NOTE: The catalytic converter requires the use of
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de- unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will de-
pending on geographical area and fre- WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are stroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
quency of use. Poor performance of blades
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. emissions control device and may seriously
may be present with chattering, marks, wa-
ter lines or wet spots. If any condition is Care must be exercised when filling or work- reduce engine performance and cause seri-
present please proceed to clean wiper ing around the washer solution. ous damage to the engine.

256

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Under normal operating conditions, the cata- • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
lytic converter will not require maintenance. WARNING! wires disconnected or removed, such as
However, it is important to keep the engine A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you when diagnostic testing.
properly tuned to assure proper catalyst opera- park over materials that can burn. Such ma-
terials might be grass or leaves coming into • Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods
tion and prevent possible catalyst damage. during very rough idle or malfunctioning op-
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
erating conditions.
CAUTION! or operate your vehicle in areas where your
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if exhaust system can contact anything that can • Do not allow the vehicle to run out of fuel.
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating burn. NOTE:
condition. In the event of engine malfunction, Intentional tampering with emissions con-
particularly involving engine misfire or other In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc- trol systems can result in civil penalties
apparent loss of performance, have your ve- tioning engine operation, a scorching odor may being assessed against you.
suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over-
hicle serviced promptly. Continued operation Cooling System
heating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
of your vehicle with a severe malfunction the engine and allow it to cool. Service, includ-
could cause the converter to overheat, result- ing a tune up to manufacturer’s specifications, WARNING!
ing in possible damage to the converter and should be obtained immediately. You or others can be badly burned by hot
vehicle. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage: your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the
ignition when the transmission is in gear and until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
the vehicle is in motion. try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or
towing the vehicle.

257

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Coolant Checks recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOL-
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec- ANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING CAUTION!
tion every 12 months (before the onset of SYSTEM IS HOT. • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
freezing weather, where applicable). If the en- than the specified HOAT engine coolant
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill (antifreeze) may result in engine damage
gine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and
appearance, the system should be drained, and may decrease corrosion protection. If a
contains a considerable amount of sediment,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
clean and flush with reliable cooling system
(antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C con- introduced into the cooling system in an
cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to re-
denser (if equipped) or radiator for any accu- emergency, it should be replaced with the
move all deposits and chemicals. Properly dis-
mulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as
pose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
gently spraying water from a garden hose
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the soon as possible.
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser
proper maintenance interval. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
(if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
Check the engine cooling system hoses for Selection Of Engine Coolant not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tight- Use only the manufacturer’s recommended en-
products, as they may not be compatible
ness of the connection at the coolant recovery gine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lu-
bricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining with the antifreeze/engine coolant (anti-
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system
for leaks. Your Vehicle” for further information. freeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use
With the engine at normal operating tempera- with Propylene Glycol based engine cool-
ture (but not running), check the cooling sys- ant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol
tem pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by
base engine coolant (antifreeze) is not rec-
draining a small amount of engine coolant
(antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. If the ommended.
cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant

258

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Adding Engine Coolant engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
Your vehicle has been built with an improved of lower quality water will reduce the amount WARNING!
engine coolant (antifreeze) that allows ex- of corrosion protection in the engine cooling The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on
tended maintenance intervals. This engine system. the cooling system pressure cap are a safety
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 5 Years precaution. Never add engine coolant (anti-
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility
or 105,000 miles (168 000 km) before replace- freeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not
to maintain the proper level of protection
ment. To prevent reducing this extended main- loosen or remove the cap to cool an over-
against freezing according to the temperatures
tenance period, it is important that you use the heated engine. Heat causes pressure to build
occurring in the area where the vehicle is
same engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
operated.
the life of your vehicle. Please review these or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
recommendations for using Hybrid Organic NOTE:
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
(antifreeze). decrease the life of the engine coolant (an- Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): tifreeze) and will require more frequent en- Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant
gine coolant (antifreeze) changes. (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring
• The manufacturer recommends using
MOPAR姞 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Cooling System Pressure Cap proper disposal. Check with your local authori-
Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss ties to determine the disposal rules for your
Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent. of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the children, do not store ethylene glycol based
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine radiator from the coolant reserve tank. engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers
coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground.
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
temperatures below -34°F (-37°C) are antici- there is any accumulation of foreign material on
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
pated. the sealing surfaces.
spills immediately.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled
or deionized water when mixing the water/
259

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Coolant Level humidity accumulating on the radiator and proper corrosion protection of your engine
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual being vaporized when the thermostat opens, which contains aluminum components.
method for determining that the coolant level is allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to • Make sure that the radiator and coolant
adequate. With the engine idling, and warm to enter the radiator. recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or ob-
normal operating temperature, the level of the
If an examination of your engine compartment structed.
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
be between the ranges indicated on the bottle. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
The radiator normally remains completely full, soon dissipate. keep the front of the condenser clean.
so there is no need to remove the radiator cap • Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti- • Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze Winter operation. If replacement is ever nec-
freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. point in the radiator and in the coolant recov- essary, install ONLY the correct type thermo-
As long as the engine operating temperature is ery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) stat. Other designs may result in unsatisfac-
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be needs to be added, the contents of the tory cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
checked once a month. coolant recovery bottle must also be pro- and increased emissions.
tected against freezing.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is Brake System
needed to maintain the proper level, it should • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi- In order to assure brake system performance,
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. tions are required, or if the level in the all brake system components should be in-
recovery bottle does not drop when the spected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance
Points To Remember engine cools, the cooling system should be Schedule” for the proper maintenance inter-
NOTE: pressure-tested for leaks. vals.
When the vehicle is stopped after a few • Maintain the engine coolant (antifreeze) con-
miles/kilometers of operation, you may ob- centration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (an-
serve vapor coming from the front of the tifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for
engine compartment. This is normally a re-
sult of moisture from rain, snow, or high
260

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
WARNING! Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further WARNING! (Continued)
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure information. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter
and possibly an accident. Driving with your or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can WARNING! fluid that has been in a tightly closed con-
result in abnormally high brake temperatures, • Use only manufacturer’s recommended tainer. Keep the master cylinder reservoir
excessive lining wear, and possible brake brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a
damage. You would not have your full braking and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your open container absorbs moisture from the
capacity in an emergency. Vehicle” for further information. Using the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
wrong type of brake fluid can severely may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
Power Disc Brakes hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sud-
damage your brake system and/or impair
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; how- den brake failure. This could result in a
ever, several hard stops during the break-in its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the accident.
period are recommended to seat the linings • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
and wear off any foreign material. original factory installed hydraulic master
cylinder reservoir. result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
Brake Master Cylinder parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
The fluid level in the master cylinders should be (Continued) Brake fluid can also damage painted and
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. If vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
necessary, add fluid to bring level to the full
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
level mark on the side of the reservoir of the
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to con-
brake master cylinder. With disc brakes, fluid
level can be expected to fall as the brake pads taminate the brake fluid. Brake seal com-
wear. If the brake fluid level is abnormally low, ponents could be damaged, causing partial
check system for leaks. or complete brake failure. This could result
in an accident.

261

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Special Additives To properly check the automatic transmission
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engi- fluid level, the following procedure must be
Selection of Lubricant
neered product and its performance may be used:
It is important that the proper lubricant is used
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, 1. Operate the engine at idle speed and nor-
in the transmission to assure optimum transmis-
do not add any fluid additives to the transmis- mal operating temperature.
sion performance. Use only manufacturer’s
sion. The only exception to this policy is the use
recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Flu- 2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In
ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
addition, avoid using transmission sealers as 3. Fully apply the parking brake.
taining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is
they may adversely affect seals.
important that the transmission fluid be main- 4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each
tained at the prescribed level using the recom- gear position ending with the shift lever in
mended fluid. No chemical flushes should be CAUTION!
PARK.
used in any transmission; only the approved Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis-
lubricant may be used. sion as the chemicals can damage your trans- 5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and
mission components. Such damage is not reinsert it until seated.
CAUTION! covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu- level on both sides. The fluid level should be
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause dete- Fluid Level Check between the HOT (upper) reference holes on
rioration in transmission shift quality and/or Check the fluid level while the transmission is at the dipstick at normal operating temperature.
torque converter shudder. Using a transmission normal operating temperature 180° F (82° C). Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen on both
fluid other than the manufacturer’s recom- This occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
driving. At normal operating temperature, the required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill.
mended fluid will result in more frequent fluid
fluid cannot be held comfortably between the After adding any quantity of oil through the
and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants,
fingertips. dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two minutes
and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Ve- for the oil to fully drain into the transmission
hicle” for further information. before rechecking the fluid level.

262

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NOTE: properly reseated. It is normal for the dip- Frequency Of Fluid Change
If it is necessary to check the transmission stick cap to spring back slightly from its Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
below the operating temperature, the fluid fully seated position, as long as its seal installed at the factory will give satisfactory
level should be between the two cold (lower) remains engaged in the dipstick tube. lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid
holes on the dipstick with the fluid at ap- changes are not necessary unless the lubricant
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid – Manual has become contaminated with water. If con-
proximately 70° F (21° C) (room tempera- Transmission
ture). If the fluid level is correctly estab- taminated with water, the fluid should be
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed changed immediately.
lished at room temperature, it should be maintenance-free system. In the event of leak-
between the HOT (upper) reference holes age or other malfunction, the system must be Transfer Case – If Equipped
when the transmission reaches 180° F (21° replaced.
C). Remember it is best to check the level at Fluid Level Check
the normal operating temperature. Manual Transmission – If Equipped The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of
the fill hole (A) when the vehicle is in a level
Selection of Lubricant position.
CAUTION! Use only manufacturer’s recommended
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below manual transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids,
50° F (10° C), it may not register on the Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
dipstick. Do not add fluid until the temperature Your Vehicle” for further information.
is elevated enough to produce an accurate Fluid Level Check
reading. Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug.
The fluid level should be between the bottom of
7. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 in
NOTE: (4.76 mm) below the bottom of the hole.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
transmission after checking or replenishing level.
fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
263

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Adding Fluid Adding Fluid The following maintenance recommendations
Fluid should be added only at filler hole until Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
fluid begins to run out of the hole. level specified above. the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
Drain Selection of Lubricant What Causes Corrosion?
First remove the fill plug (B), then the drain plug Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Corrosion is the result of deterioration or re-
(C). The recommended tightening torque for Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine moval of paint and protective coatings from
the drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further your vehicle.
34 N·m). information.
The most common causes are:
Appearance Care and Protection • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
CAUTION! from Corrosion
When replacing the plugs, do not overtighten • Stone and gravel impact.
them. You could damage them and cause Protection of Body and Paint from
Corrosion • Insects, tree sap and tar.
them to leak.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according • Salt in the air near sea-coast localities.
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
Selection of Lubricant • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. that make roads passable in snow and ice, and
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine those that are sprayed on trees and road • Bird droppings.
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further surfaces during other seasons, are highly cor-
Washing
information. rosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to air- • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
Front/Rear Axle Fluid borne contaminants, road surfaces on which your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR姞 Car
the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap,
Fluid Level Check
weather and other extreme conditions will have and rinse the panels completely with clear
Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the
an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and water.
oil fill hole.
underbody protection.

264

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have Special Care • Use MOPAR姞 Touch-Up Paint or equivalent
accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR姞 • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you on scratches or chips as soon as possible.
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar- Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to
equivalent to remove. riage at least once a month.
match the color of your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as • It is important that the drain holes in the lower
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
MOPAR姞 Cleaner Wax or equivalent to re- edges of the doors, rocker panels and tail- All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
move road film, stains, and to protect your gate are kept clear and open. and chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent
paint. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in corrosion. To remove heavy soil, use MOPAR姞
the paint, touch them up immediately. The Wheel Cleaner or equivalent, or select a non-
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power cost of such repairs is considered the re- abrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scour-
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin sponsibility of the owner. ing pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal
out the paint finish.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an acci- polishes. Only MOPAR姞 cleaners or equivalent
dent or similar cause which destroys the are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
CAUTION! Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning paint and protective coating, have your ve-
hicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost solutions or harsh brushes that may damage
materials such as steel wool or scouring the wheels’ protective finish.
of such repairs is considered the responsi-
powder, which will scratch metal and bility of the owner. Interior Care
painted surfaces. Use MOPAR姞 Total Clean or equivalent to clean
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi • If you carry special cargo such as chemi-
cals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., assure that fabric upholstery and carpeting.
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or re-
such materials are well packaged and Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a
moval of paint and decals.
sealed. damp cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR姞 Total
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR姞 Spot & Stain
consider installing mud or stone shields be- Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary.
hind each wheel.
265

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All姞. Use equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
MOPAR姞 Total Clean or equivalent to clean scrapers or other sharp instruments which may the vehicle to wash them.
vinyl upholstery. scratch the elements. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray or if the buckles do not work properly.
WARNING! cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur- Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
poses. Many are potentially flammable and, if
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses CAUTION!
used in closed areas, they may cause respi- The lenses in front of the instruments in this To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’s
ratory harm. vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When interior trim and top, follow these precautions:
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
CAUTION! avoid scratching the plastic. • Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with
When installing hanging air fresheners in your 1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap the top down, as exposure to sun or rain may
vehicle, read the installation instructions care- solution may be used, but do not use high damage interior trim.
fully. Some air fresheners will damage the alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is • Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching
finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag. agents on top material, as damage may
to directly contact any surface. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. result.
Seat Belt Maintenance • Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down
Glass Surfaces and dry on the paint, leaving a streak.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
regular basis with MOPAR姞 Glass Cleaner or chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This • After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, al-
will weaken the fabric. Sun damage will also ways make sure it is completely dry before
any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
weaken the fabric. lowering.
Never use an abrasive-type cleaner. Use cau-
tion when cleaning inside rear windows If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR姞 Total • Be especially careful when washing the win-
Clean or equivalent, a mild soap solution, or dows by following the directions for “Care of
Fabric Top Windows.”
266

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WASHING — Use MOPAR姞 Car Wash or Care of Fabric Top Windows
equivalent, or mild soap suds, lukewarm water, CAUTION! (Continued)
and a brush with soft bristles. If extra cleaning • It is recommended that the top be free of
CAUTION!
is required, use MOPAR姞 Convertible Cloth Top water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plastic
Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming opening a door or lowering a window while
windows which can be scratched unless spe-
cleaner on the entire top, but support the top the top is wet may allow water to drip into
cial care is taken by following these directions:
from underneath. the vehicle’s interior.
RINSING — Be sure to remove all traces of • Use care when washing the vehicle, water 1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. In-
cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean pressure directed at the weather strip seals stead, use a microfiber towel or soft cotton
water. Remember to allow the top to dry before may cause water to leak into the vehicle’s cloth moistened with cold or warm, clean
lowering it. interior. water, and wipe across the window, not up
• Careless handling and storage of the re- and down. MOPAR姞 Jeep Soft Glass Window
movable roof panels may damage the Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic
CAUTION!
seals, causing water to leak into the vehi- windows without scratching. It removes fine
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
scratches to improve visibility and provides UV
interior water damage, stains or mildew on the cle’s interior.
protection to help prevent yellowing.
top material: • The front panel(s) must be positioned prop-
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation 2. When washing, never use hot water or
can damage the top material. Also, in- can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s anything stronger than a mild soap. Never use
interior. solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning
creased water pressure may force past the
agents.
weather strips.
3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water,
(Continued) then wipe with a soft and slightly moist, clean
cloth.

267

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. When removing frost, snow or ice, never 6. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any Cavity Car- Mini Description
use a scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to tridge Fuse
warm water only if you must clean the window remove and may damage the windows. Fuse
quickly. J1 — —
5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from FUSES J2 30 Amp Transfer Case
off-road driving will have a major impact on Totally Integrated Power Module Pink Module
zipper operation. Even normal on-road driving The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is J3 — —
and vehicle washing will eventually impact win- located in the engine compartment near the J4 25 Amp Driver Door
dow zipper operation. To maintain ease of use battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, Natural Node
of the window zippers, each window zipper mini fuses and relays. A label that identifies J5 25 Amp Passenger Door
should be cleaned and lubricated regularly. each component is printed on the inside of the Natural Node
Use MOPAR姞 Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and cover. J6 40 Amp Anti-Lock Brake
Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper opera-
Green System (ABS)
tion. Before applying, make sure the zipper
Pump/Stability
teeth are clear of sand, mud, and other mate-
Control System
rials. Clean both sides of the zipper, not just
one side. Rinse both zipper halves with fresh J7 30 Amp Anti-Lock Brake
water and allow to dry. Aggressively work the Pink System (ABS)
MOPAR姞 Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubri- Valve/Stability
cant or equivalent into the zipper teeth. If a Control System
stuck zipper slide is experienced, work the J8 — —
MOPAR姞 Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubri- J9 40 Amp PZEV Sec
cant or equivalent into the zipper slide. Several Green Motor/Flex Fuel
applications may be required before the zipper Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash
comes free. Pink Relay/Manifold
Tuning Valve

268

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cavity Car- Mini Description Cavity Car- Mini Description Cavity Car- Mini Description
tridge Fuse tridge Fuse tridge Fuse
Fuse Fuse Fuse
J11 30 Amp Sway Bar M1 15 Amp Center High- M9 20 Amp Rear Heated
Pink Blue Mounted Stop Yellow Seat – If
J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw Light (CHMSL)/ Equipped
Yellow (IOD) – Main Switch Stop M10 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw
J14 40 Amp Rear Defroster Lamp Feed Yellow – Vehicle Enter-
Green M2 20 Amp Relay Trailer tainment System,
J15 30 Amp Front Blower Yellow Lighting (Sto- Satellite Digital
Pink plamp) Audio Receiver
J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid M3 20 Amp Frt/Rear Axle (SDARS), DVD,
Green Yellow Locker Relay Hands-Free
J18 20 Amp Powertrain Con- M4 — — Module, RADIO,
Blue trol Module M5 25 Amp Power Inverter – Antenna, Univer-
(PCM) Trans Natural If Equipped sal Garage Door
Range M6 20 Amp Power Outlet Opener, Vanity
Yellow #1/Rain Sensor Lamp
J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan
Yellow M7 20 Amp Power Outlet #2 M11 10 Amp (Ignition Off
Yellow (BATT/ACC SE- Red Draw) Climate
J20 30 Amp Front Wiper
LECT) Control System,
Pink LO/HI
Underhood Lamp
J21 20 Amp Front/Rear M8 20 Amp Front Heated
Yellow Seat M12 30 Amp Amplifier
Blue Washer
Green
J22 — Spare

269

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cavity Car- Mini Description Cavity Car- Mini Description Cavity Car- Mini Description
tridge Fuse tridge Fuse tridge Fuse
Fuse Fuse Fuse
M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw M16 10 Amp Airbag Module M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump, Die-
Yellow – Cabin Com- Red Yellow sel Lift Pump –
partment Node, M17 15 Amp Left Tail/License/ Export Only
Wireless Control Blue Park Lamp M26 — —
Module, SIREN, M18 15 Amp Right Tail/Park/ M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch
Multifunction Blue Run Lamp Red Feed, Wireless
Control Switch M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down Module
M14 20 Amp Trailer Tow (Ex- Natural (ASD #1 and #2) M28 10 Amp Powertrain Con-
Yellow port Only) M20 15 Amp Cabin Compart- Red trol Module
M15 20 Amp Climate Control Blue ment Node Inte- M29 — —
Yellow System, Rear rior Light, Switch M30 15 Amp Wiper Motor Frt,
View Mirror, Bank Blue J1962 Diagnostic
Cabin Compart- M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down Feed
ment Node, Yellow (ASD #3) M31 20 Amp Backup Lamps
Transfer Case M22 10 Amp Right Horn (HI/ Yellow
Switch, Multi- Red LOW) M32 10 Amp Airbag Controller,
Function Control
M23 10 Amp Left Horn (HI/ Red TT EUROPE
Switch, Tire
Red LOW) M33 10 Amp Powertrain Con-
Pressure Moni-
tor, Glow Plug M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper Red troller
Module – Export Natural
Diesel Only

270

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cavity Car- Mini Description VEHICLE STORAGE
CAUTION!
tridge Fuse If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more
• When installing the Integrated Power Mod-
Fuse than 21 days, you may want to take steps to
ule cover, it is important to ensure the cover protect your battery. You may:
M34 10 Amp Park Assist, Cli-
is properly positioned and fully latched.
Red mate Control
Failure to do so may allow water to get into • Remove Cartridge fuse #J13 in the Power
System, Head- Distribution Center (PDC) labeled Ignition-
lamp Wash, the Integrated Power Module, and possibly
Off Draw (IOD) and store it in a safe location
Compass result in an electrical system failure. within the PDC.
M35 10 Amp Heated Mirrors • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct am- • Or, disconnect the negative cable from the
Red
perage rating. The use of a fuse with a battery.
M36 20 Amp Power Outlet
Yellow rating other than indicated may result in a • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out
M37 10 Amp Anti-Lock Brake dangerous electrical system overload. If a of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
Red System, Elec- properly rated fuse continues to blow, it more, run the air conditioning system at idle
tronic Stability indicates a problem in the circuit that must for about five minutes in the fresh air and
Control, Stop high blower setting. This will ensure ad-
be corrected.
Lamp Switch, equate system lubrication to minimize the
Fuel Pump Relay possibility of compressor damage when the
M38 25 Amp Lock/Unlock Mo- system is started again.
Natural tors

271

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 REPLACEMENT BULBS Exterior Lights Bulb Type NOTE:
Backup Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W Numbers refer to commercial bulb types
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (1) . . L.E.D. that can be purchased from your local au-
Interior Lights Bulb Type
Front Fog Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . PSX24W thorized dealer.
Auto. Trans. Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . 658
Courtesy Lights, Under Dash (1) . . . . . 906 Rear Fog Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . P27/7W If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your
Heater Control Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . 194 Front Direction Lamps (2) . . . . . . . P27/7W authorized dealer or refer to the applicable
Front Side Repeaters/Side Marker Service Manual.
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp
(Rear Window Defogger, and Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Wash/Wipe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ** Headlamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4
Soundbar Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 912 Front Position Lamps (2) . . . . . . . 12V14W
** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer. Stop/Rear Position Lamps (2) . . . . . P27/7W
Rear Direction Lamps (2). . . . . . . PY27/7W
License Lamp (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W

272

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) — Two Door Models 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Fuel (Approximate) — Four Door Models 22.5 Gallons 85 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.8 Liter Engine 6 Quarts 5.7 Liters
2.8 Liter Diesel Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.8 Liter Engine (MOPAR姞 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula 13 Quarts 12 Liters
or equivalent.)
2.8 Liter Diesel Engine (MOPAR姞 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile 13 Quarts 12 Liters
Formula or equivalent.)
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

273

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR姞 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy) or equivalent.
Engine Oil – Gasoline (Non ACEA Catego- Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard
ries) MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
MB 229.31 or MB 229.51 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil is not available.
Engine Oil – Gasoline (ACEA Categories) For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils meet-
ing the requirements of ACEA C3, and approved to MB 229.31 or MB 229.51. SAE 5W-30 engine oil
approved to MB 229.31 or MB 229.51 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil is not available.
Engine Oil - Diesel (without Particulate Filter) Use SAE 0W-40 diesel engine oils confirming to API Quality CI-4 or CJ-4. For countries that use the
ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils meeting the requirements of
ACEA C3 and approved to MB 229.31 or MB 229.51.
Engine Oil – Diesel (with Particulate Filter) Use SAE 5W-30 diesel engine oils conforming to API Quality CI-4 or CJ-4. For countries that use the
ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils meeting the requirements of
ACEA C3 (LOW ASH) and approved to MB 229.31 or MB 229.51.
Spark Plugs – 3.8L Engine RE14PLP5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR姞 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Fuel Selection – Gasoline Engines 91 Octane
Fuel Selection – Diesel Engines 50 Cetane or higher (Less than 15 ppm Sulfur)

274

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped MOPAR姞 ATF+4姞 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4姞 product.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped MOPAR姞 Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent (meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-9224)
Transfer Case MOPAR姞 ATF+4姞 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4姞 product.
Axle Differential (Front) MOPAR姞 Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent.
Axle Differential (Rear) 226 RBI (Model 44) - MOPAR姞 Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent. For
trailer towing, use MOPAR姞 Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W-140) or equivalent. Models
equipped with Trac-Lok require an additive.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR姞 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available,
then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR姞 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR姞 ATF+4姞 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent li-
censed ATF+4姞 product.

275

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 276

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
• Maintenance Schedule – Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . 278
• Maintenance Schedule – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 290

277

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE months since your last oil change even if oil level reading. Add oil only when the level
the oil change indicator message is NOT is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Maintenance Schedule – Gasoline illuminated.
Engine • Check the windshield washer solvent and
• Change your engine oil more often if you add if required.
The oil change indicator system will remind you
drive your vehicle off-road for an ex-
that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched- Once a Month
tended period of time.
uled maintenance.
• Under no circumstances should oil • Check tire pressure and look for unusual
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “CHANgE change intervals exceed 7,500 miles wear or damage.
OIL” will flash in the instrument cluster odom- (12 000 km) or six months, whichever • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the
eter and a single chime will sound, indicating comes first. terminals as required.
that an oil change is necessary.
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator • Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir,
The oil change indicator message will illumi- message after completing the scheduled oil brake master cylinder, power steering and
nate approximately 7,000 miles (11 200 km) change. If this scheduled oil change is per- transmission and add as needed.
after the most recent oil change was per- formed by someone other than your dealer, the
formed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as message can be reset by referring to the steps • Check all lights and other electrical items for
possible, within 500 miles (800 km). However, described under “Instrument Cluster correct operation.
an earlier oil change at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Un- At Each Oil Change
may be required if the vehicle is operated derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
under “Severe Duty Conditions” later in this information. • Change the engine oil filter.
section. • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
At Each Stop for Fuel
NOTE: • Check the manual transmission fluid level.
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes
• The oil change indicator message will not after a fully warmed engine is shut off.
monitor the time since the last oil change.
Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on
Change your vehicle’s oil if it has been six level ground will improve the accuracy of the

278

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance
items may result in damage to the vehicle.

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages for the required maintenance
intervals.
Severe Duty Conditions
†† Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months if
using your vehicle under any of the following
severe duty conditions:
• Stop and go driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial
service).
• Off-road or desert operation.

279

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
filter.†† ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

280

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
filter.†† ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if ❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
necessary. off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
and boot seals, replace if necessary. off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

281

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or 45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
filter.†† ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

282

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 52,500 Miles (84,000 km) or 60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
filter.†† ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and main sump filter if using your vehicle for any
of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

283

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 67,500 Miles (108,000 km) or 75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 82,500 Miles (132,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance Service 60 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule Schedule Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.†† filter.†† filter.††
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
necessary. following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends if necessary.
and boot seals, replace if necessary. ❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change
if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
60 months if not done at 105,000 miles
(168 000 km).

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

284

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.†
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

285

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 97,500 Miles (156,000 km) or 105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
filter.†† ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the ignition cables.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

286

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 112,500 Miles (180,000 km) or 120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
filter.†† ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Replace accessory drive belt(s).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
necessary. ❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
❏ Inspect exhaust system. off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends ❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
and boot seals, replace if necessary. fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid, and filter(s).

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

287

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 127,500 Miles (204,000 km) or 135,000 Miles (216,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
102 Months Maintenance Schedule
Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
filter.†† ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

288

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 142,500 Miles (228,000 km) or 150,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
114 Months Maintenance Schedule
Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
filter.†† ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

289

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 † This maintenance is recommended by the Maintenance Schedule – Diesel Diesel Models without Diesel Particulate
manufacturer to the owner, but is not required Engine Filter (DPF)
to maintain emissions warranty. †† Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at
Diesel Models with Diesel Particulate Filter every 6,250 miles (10 000 km) or six months if
(DPF) using your vehicle under any of the following
WARNING! The oil change indicator system will remind you
You can be badly injured working on or around severe duty conditions:
that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-
a motor vehicle. Do only service work for uled maintenance. • Stop and go driving.
which you have the knowledge and the right • Driving in dusty conditions.
A “CHANgE OIL” message will flash in the
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
instrument cluster odometer and a single • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
ability to perform a service job, take your chime will sound, indicating that an oil change
vehicle to a competent mechanic. is necessary. • Trailer towing.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil • Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial
change indicator message will illuminate, this service).
means that service is required for your vehicle. • Off-road or desert operation.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos-
At Each Stop for Fuel
sible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator
after a fully warmed engine is shut off.
message after completing the scheduled oil
change. If this scheduled oil change is per- Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on
level ground will improve the accuracy of the
formed by someone other than your dealer the
oil level reading. Add oil only when the level
message can be reset by referring to the steps
is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
described under “Instrument Cluster
Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in ⬙Un- • Check the windshield washer solvent, add
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further as required.
information.
290

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Once a Month Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the
12,500 Miles (20,000 km) or
• Check the tire pressure and look for unusual 12 Months Maintenance Service
following pages for the required maintenance
wear or damage.
intervals. Schedule
• Inspect the battery; clean and tighten the ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
NOTE:
terminals as required.
Under no circumstances should oil change filter.††
• Check the fluid levels of engine coolant/ intervals exceed 12,500 miles (20 000 km) or ❏ Rotate tires.
antifreeze deaeration bottle, brake master 12 months, whichever comes first. ❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
cylinder, and transmission, and add as conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
needed.
filter, and replace if necessary.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
for correct operation. ❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle
At Each Oil Change fluid.
• Change the engine oil filter. ❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if
necessary.
• Inspect the exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the brake linings.
• Inspect brake hoses.
• Check the engine coolant/antifreeze level,
hoses, and clamps. Odometer Reading Date
• Inspect engine accessory drive belts. Re-
Repair Order # Dealer Code
place as necessary.
• Inspect for the presence of water in the fuel Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
filter/water separator unit.

291

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service 37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or
Schedule 36 Months Maintenance Service
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† Schedule
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter. filter.††
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. ❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
❏ Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit. conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid. filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
❏ Inspect the brake linings. ❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle
fluid.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings.
❏ Replace the engine accessory drive belt.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

292

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
❏ Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

293

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 62,500 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and main sump filter if using your vehicle for any
of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

294

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service 87,500 Miles (140,000 km) or
Schedule 84 Months Maintenance Service
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† Schedule
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter. filter.††
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. ❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
❏ Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit. conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid. filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
❏ Inspect the brake linings. ❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle
❏ Replace the engine accessory drive belt. fluid.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

295

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service 112,500 Miles (180,000 km) or
Schedule 108 Months Maintenance
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† Service Schedule
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter. filter.††
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant (antifreeze). ❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
❏ Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit. filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid. ❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary. ❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle
❏ Inspect the brake linings. fluid.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings.
❏ Replace the engine accessory drive belt.

Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

296

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 125,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service WARNING!
Schedule You can be badly injured working on or around
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.†† a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for
❏ Rotate tires. which you have the knowledge and the right
❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter. equipment. If you have any doubt about your
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. ability to perform a service job, take your
❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit. vehicle to a competent mechanic.
❏ Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Inspection and service should be performed
❏ Replace the engine timing belt, and timing belt tensioner.
anytime a malfunction is observed or sus-
❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid. pected. Retain all receipts.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
❏ Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid. Replace main sump filter and spin-on
cooler return filter (if equipped).

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

297

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 298

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
• ARGENTINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
• AUSTRALIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
• AUSTRIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
• BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
• BELGIUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
• BOLIVIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
• BRAZIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
• BULGARIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
• CHILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
• CHINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
• COLOMBIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
• COSTA RICA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
• CROATIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
• CZECH REPUBLIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
• DENMARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

299

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • DOMINICAN REPUBLIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
• ECUADOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
• EL SALVADOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
• ESTONIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
• FINLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
• FRANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
• GERMANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
• GRAND DUCHY OF LUXEMBOURG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
• GREECE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
• GUATEMALA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
• HONDURAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
• HUNGARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
• IRELAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
• ITALY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
• LATVIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
• LITHUANIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
• NETHERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
• NEW ZEALAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
• NORWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
• PANAMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
• PARAGUAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
• PERU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
300

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • POLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
• PORTUGAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
• PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS . . . . . . . . . . 306
• ROMANIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
• RUSSIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
• SLOVENIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
• SPAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
• SWEDEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
• SWITZERLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
• TAIWAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
• TURKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
• UKRAINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
• UNITED KINGDOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
• URUGUAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
• VENEZUELA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

301

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE • Service history of your vehicle. BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN
The manufacturer distributors are vitally inter- • An accurate description of the problem and Interamericana Trading Company
ested in your satisfaction with their products the conditions under which it occurs. Warrens, St. Michael
and services. If a servicing problem or other Barbados, West Indies
difficulty should occur, we recommend that you ARGENTINA Tel.: 246–417–8000
take the following steps: Chrysler Argentina S.A Fax: 246–425–2888
Boulevard Azucena Villaflor 435
Discuss the problem at the authorized dealer C1107CII BELGIUM
with the dealer principal or the service man- Buenos Aires, Argentina Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg NV
ager. Management personnel at the authorized Tel.: +54-11-4891 7900 Tollaan 68
dealer are in the best position to resolve the Fax: +54-11-4891 7901 B-1200 Brussel
problem quickly. Tel.: 0800-94634 (free phone number)
When you contact the distributor please
AUSTRALIA Fax:+32 (0)2 717 3301
Chrysler
provide all of the following information: BOLIVIA
Chrysler Australia Pty. Ltd.
• Your name, address and phone number. ACN 124 956 505 Ovando & Cia S.A.
PO Box 4145, Dandenong South Vic. 3175 Av. Cristobal de Mendoza (2do Anillo) y Canal
• Vehicle Identification Number (this 17 digit Isuto
number is found on an etched plate or label, Ph. (03) 9238–2600
Santa Cruz, Bolivia
located on the left front corner of the instru- AUSTRIA Tel.: (591-3) 336 3100
ment panel, visible through the windshield. It Chrysler Austria Gesellschaft m.b.H. Fax: (591-3) 334 0229
is also available from your vehicle registra- Felmayergasse 2
tion or title). A-1210 Wien BRAZIL
Tel: +43-1-5465 15131 Chrysler do Brasil
• Selling and servicing authorized dealer. Av. Alfred Jurzykowski, 562
Fax: +43-1-5465 15132
• Vehicle’s delivery date and current odometer 09680-900 São Bernardo do Campo-S.P
distance. Tel: 55 11 4173 6611
Fax: 55 11 4173 9200
302

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 BULGARIA COLOMBIA CZECH REPUBLIC
BALKAN STAR Chrysler Colombia S.A. Chrysler Czech Republic s.r.o
Resbarska Str. 5 Avenida Calle 26 # 70A-25 Daimlerova 2296/2
1510 Sofia Bogotá Colombia 149 45 Praha 4 - Chodov
Tel.: 359 2 91988 Tel: 57 1 4236700 Czech Republic
Fax: 359 2 945 40 14 Fax: 57 (1) 410 5667 Tel: +420 (0)2 71077 111
Tel: +420 (0)2 25101 111
CHILE COSTA RICA Fax: +420 (0)2 71077 507
Comercial Chrysler S.A. AutoStar
Av. Americo Vespucio 1601, Quilicura La Uruca, frente al Banco Nacional DENMARK
Santiago, Chile San José, Costa Rica Chrysler Danmark ApS
Tel.: (56-2) 620 7600 Tel.: (506) 295 - 0000 Frederikskaj 4
Fax: (56-2) 730 6201 Fax: (506) 295 - 0052 DK- 1790 København V.
Tel: +45 (0)35 256 830
CHINA CROATIA Fax: +45 (0)35 256 832
Chrysler Group (China) Sales Limited EUROLINE d.o.o.
16F,Gemdale Plaza Tower A Kovinska 5 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
No.91 Jian Guo Road 10 000 Zagreb Reid y Compañia
Chaoyang District Tel.: 385 1 3441 111 John F. Kennedy Casi Esq. Lope de Vega
Beijing 100022, P.R. China Fax: 385 1 3441 113 Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic
Chrysler Brand Tel: 400-650-1195 Tel.: (809) 562–7211
Dodge Brand Tel: 400-650-0118 Fax: (809) 565-8774

303

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ECUADOR FINLAND GRAND DUCHY OF LUXEMBOURG
Chrysler Jeep Automotriz del Ecuador Chrysler FinlandOy TNT MAILFAST
Av. Juan Tanca Marengo km. 4.5 Ristipellontie 5 C/O Chrysler Belgium/Luxembourg
Guayaquil, Ecuador 00390 HELSINKI BRU/BRU/37850
Tel.: (593) 4 225 7935 Tel: 020 54771 Antwoord Nummer 193032
Fax: (593) 4 224 7787 Fax: 020 5477 485 1930 Zaventem
Belgium
EL SALVADOR FRANCE Tel.: 0800 6661
Grupo Q del Salvador Chrysler France
Fax: 32 02 717 33
Blvd. Los Próceres y Avenida No. 1, Lomas de Parc de Rocquencourt
San Francisco, BP100 GREECE
San Salvador, El Salvador F-78153 Le Chesnay Cedex Chrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas
Tel.: (503) 22730988 Tel: +33 1 39 23 56 00 240-242 Kifisias Avenue
Fax: (503) 278 5731 Fax: +33 1 39 23 57 92 15231 Halandri Athens, Greece
Tel.: +30 210 6700800
ESTONIA GERMANY Fax: +30 210 6700820
Silberauto AS Chrysler Deutschland GmbH
Järvevana tee 11 Englische Straße 30 GUATEMALA
11314 Tallinn D-10587 Berlin Grupo Q del Guatemala
Tel.: 06 266 098 Telefon +49 (0)30 2690-0 Edificio Grupo Q, calle Mariscal Cruz 9-04,
Tel.: 06 266 050 Telefax +49 (0)30 2690 3999 Zona 4,
Fax: 06 266 066 Ciudad de Guatemala, Guatemala
Tel.: +502 6685 9500

304

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 HONDURAS ITALY NEW ZEALAND
Grupo Q de Honduras Chrysler Italia S.r.l. Chrysler New Zealand
Blvd.. Centro América frente a Plaza Miraflores, Via Giulio Vincenzo Bona, 110 Private Bag 14907
Tegucigalpa, Honduras 00156 Roma Panmure New Zealand
Tel.: (504) 235-9220 Tel: 06 41442812 Tel: 09573 7800
Fax: (504) 232-6564 Fax: 06 418823114 Fax: 09573 7808
E-mail: [email protected]
HUNGARY NORWAY
Chrysler Automotive Hungaria Kft LATVIA Chrysler Norge A/S
H-1133 Budapest TC MOTORS LTD. Solheimveien 7
Kárpát u 21 40 Krasta Str. N-1471 Lørenskog
Tel.:+36-1-887-7000 LV-1003 Riga Tel : +47 67 92 60 00
Fax: +36-1-887-7098 Tel.: 07 812 312 Fax : +47 67 90 53 10
FAX: 07 812 313
IRELAND PANAMA
C.J. IRELAND CONCESSIONAIRES LIMITED LITHUANIA Grupo Q de Panamá
Clonlara Avenue Silberauto AS Calle 50 Final, Edificio 68, San Francisco,
Baldonnell Business Park Laisves av. 125 A Panamá, Panamá
Baldonnell Dublin 22. LT — 2022 VILNIUS Tel.: (507) 303-1100
Ireland Tel.: 02 301037 Fax: (507) 303-0980
Tel.: 1890 946866 Fax: 02 301036
PARAGUAY
NETHERLANDS Cencar S.A.
Chrysler Nederland B.V. Avda Mariscal Lopez No. 5700
Postbus 2088 Asuncion, Paraguay
NL-3500 GB Utrecht Tel.: 59521515911
Tel:+31 (0)30 247 19 11 Fax: 59521515924
Fax: +31 (0)30 247 16 00
305

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 PERU PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN SLOVENIA
Divemotor S.A. ISLANDS Chrysler/Jeep Import d.d.
Calle Alejandro Bussalleu 151, Urb. Sta. Chrysler International Services, S.A. Leskoskova 2
Catalina - La Victoria P.O. Box 191857 1122 Ljubljana
Lima, Peru San Juan 009191857 Tel.: 01 5843 138
Tel.: (51-1) 712 2000 Tel.: 7877825757 Fax: 01 5843 222
Fax: (51-1) 712 2002 Fax: 7877823345 SPAIN
POLAND ROMANIA Chrysler España S.L.
Chrysler Polska Sp. z o.o. S.C. Auto Rom S.R.L. Dpto. De Atención al Cliente Chrysler, Jeep y
ul. Gotlieba Daimlera 1 Bucuresti Dodge
02-480 Warszawa Bd. Expozitiei nr. 2 Apdo. De Correos 24
Tel:+ 801 330 300 RO-78334 19200 Azuqueca de Henares (Guadalajara)
Tel.: 01 2240020 25 Tel.: 902 888 782
PORTUGAL Fax: 913 496 529
Chrysler Portugal S.A. Fax: 01 2241638
Qta. da Fonte – Edif. Da Amélia RUSSIA SWEDEN
Rua Victor Câmara, 2 1aA Chrysler RUS SAO Chrysler Sverige
2770-229 Paço de Arcos 39A Leningradsky prospect Bronsyxegatan 14,
Portugal 125167 Moscow Box 50530
Tel : +351 (0)21 323 91 00 Tel: +7 495 745-2600 S-202 50 Malmö
Fax: +351 (0)21 323 91 99 Fax: +7 495 745-2601 Tel:+46 (0)8 752 9858
Fax: +46 (0)8 752 6483

306

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SWITZERLAND UKRAINE VENEZUELA
Chrysler Switzerland GmbH JSC AutoCapital Chrysler de Venezuela LLC
Bernstrasse 55 Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15 Avenida Pancho Pepe Croquer. Zona Industrial
CH-8952 Schlieren 01004 Kyiv Norte
Tel: Tel.: +38 044 206 8888 Valencia, Estado Caraboro
• German : 0800 80 29 20 Fax: +38 044 206 8889 Tel: +(58) 241-613 2400
• French : 0800 80 29 21 Fax: +(58) 241-613 2538
• Italian : 0800 80 29 22
UNITED KINGDOM Fax: (58) 241-6132602
Chrysler UK Ltd.
Telefax +41 (0) 44 755 64 00 (58) 241-6132438
Tongwell
PO BOX: 1960
TAIWAN Milton Keynes MK15 8BA
Services And Parts
Chrysler Taiwan Co. , LTD. Tel.: 01908 301090
Zona Industrial II, Av. Norte-Sur 5 C/C Calle
13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza Fax: 01908 301203
Este-Oeste
1109 Min Sheng East Road, Section 3
URUGUAY C.C LD Center Local B-2
Taipei Taiwan R.O.C.
Malunix. S.A. Valencia, Estado Carabobo
Tel.: 080081581
Miguelete 2276 Telf: (58) 241-6132757
Fax: 886225471871
Montevideo, Uruguay (58) 241-6132773
TURKEY Tel: (598-2) 401 7818 Fax: (58) 241-6132743
Chrysler Jeep Tic. A.S. Fax: (598-2) 402 2666
TEM Otoyolu , Hadimkoy Cikisi
34900 Buyukcekmece - Istanbul
Tel : + 90 - 212 - 867 40 00
Fax : + 90 - 212 - 867 44 63

307

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 308

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 309

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 310

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 10
INDEX

311

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . 148,207 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . 23 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . 160 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . 168 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Automatic Transaxle Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Cleaner Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . 255 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 191,262 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . 188
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . 262 Break-In Recommendations, New
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . 165 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . 174 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . 255 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . 165,168 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . 191,193 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Caps, Filler
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . 35,38,49,148 Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Axle Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . 48
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,165
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Keyless Transmitter Replacement Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . 8 (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 273 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,49 Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . 207 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . 255 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . 48
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . 148 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . 208 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . 38,39,44,46
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . 15
312

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . 42,44 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . 140 Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Defroster, Windshield . . . . 49,166,167,171 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . 91
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . 88 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . 208
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . 251 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . 209
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . 165 Diesel Engine Maintenance . . . . . . . . 290 Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . 211
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,161 Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . 209
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . 226 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . 211
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . 85 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . 154,160 Dipsticks Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . 212
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . 245 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 259 Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . 16 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Disposal (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,158
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . 259 Used Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . 259 Emergency, In Case of
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . 258 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . 147
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . 260 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Engine
Selection of Coolant Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,273 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . 47
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Dual Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,250
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Compartment Identification . . . . 249,250
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
313

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252,273 Flashers Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,146 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . 181 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . 252,253,273 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . 226,227,251
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 262 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Gauges
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . 253 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 263 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . 149
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . 36 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . 16 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . 274 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat . . . . . . . . 80 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . 186,188,191
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,256 Folding Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . 244
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 15,17
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . 194 Glow Plug Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,266 Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . 238 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . 227
Fabric Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . 264 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . 227
Filters Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . 57
314

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . 158 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Hard Top, Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 56 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,44
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . 238 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . 143 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . 266 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . 268 Leveling, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Headlights Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . 265 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,83
Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . 88 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,38,49,148
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 239,240 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . 215
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . 216 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Check Engine (Malfunction
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . 85
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . 14 Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,215
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . 153
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . 148
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . 14 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . 146 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . 217 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Glow Plug Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . 238
315

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Headlight Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . 221
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,44 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . 83
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 147
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . 216 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . 254 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . 47
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . 251
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 278,290
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . 224
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,154
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,150,154
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 185,263
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . 198
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . 198
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . 149 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . 149 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . 152,160,290
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . 152,160,290
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . 150 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . 261
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . 153,215 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,84,146 Methanol Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . 154,160 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Warning (Instrument Cluster Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Locking Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Locks Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 146
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Recommendation . . . . . . . 252,253,273
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . 8
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253,273
Modular Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
316

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . 251 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . 162 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . 6 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 56 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . 164 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . 160
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . 149,238 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . 264 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . 6 Rear Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,41
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . 140 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . 140 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . 49
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . 50
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . 278,290
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . 57 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . 265 (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,49
Power Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 31
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,206 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,46
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Remote Control Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . 31 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . 239 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 16 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Pretensioners Remote Sound System (Radio) Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

317

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . 28 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Sunrider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,135
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . 173 Supplemental Restraint System -
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,84,146 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,119 Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic . . . . . 197
Fold and Tumble Rear . . . . . . . . . . 80 Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . 164 Swing Gate, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Sound Systems . Refer to the Sound Systems Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Booklet
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 90 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . 168
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . 149
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . 42
Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 180 Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . 16
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 15 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . 14 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . 181 Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,182
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . 15 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 180 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,217
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Steering Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,206 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 188,191 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 185 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . 164 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239,240
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . 221
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 150
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,271 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 236 Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . 94 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . 28 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,271 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
318

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,191 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,263 Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . 219 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . 8
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . 230 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . 191,193 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . 265
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227,245 Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . 265
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Towing Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . 149 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Trac-Lok Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,146 Windshield Defroster . . . . . 49,166,167,171
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Windshield, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Traction Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . 57 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . 87,256
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . 215 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . 28 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . 256
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . 233 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . 230 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . 230 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . 8
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . 8
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,271
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . . . . . . 194 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . 74
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
319

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 320

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine